Home

User`s Guide

1. 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer Scenario 5 Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ 11 Your printer comes with the RJ 11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ 11 plug Faxing 100 If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection then you need to use a telephone adapter An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer and you may need to purchase it separately J There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer Part name Part number Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519 Faxing 101 Connecting the printer to a non RJ 11 wall jack 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ 11 adapter and then connect the adapter to the wall jack 3 If you want t
2. Understanding the printer menus Print Recovery Jam Recovery Print Recovery Jam Assist Print Recovery Page Protect On Press Sleep Button Do Nothing Sleep Hibernate Press and Hold Sleep Button Do Nothing Sleep Hibernate 156 Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes e Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks e On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages e Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper Note On is the factory default setting Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Off is the factory default setting This prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page e On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep button while the printer is idle Notes Sleep is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration If the printer is in Sleep mode then the display appears off and the Sleep button turns amber Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the control panel to wake the printer from Sleep mode If the printer is in Hibernate mode then the display is com
3. Close the specified door Complex page some data may not have printed 39 Try one or more of the following e From the control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job e Install additional printer memory Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer e The printer firmware has been updated e The tray for the print job has been removed e The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Defective flash detected 51 Try one or more of the following Replace the defective flash memory card From the printer control panel touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Troubleshooting 273 Disk full 62 Try one or more of the following e From the control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk e Install a hard disk with larger capacity Disk full
4. Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Note This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase removes whatever is within the area selected Fold This folds the paper in two bifold or three trifold Note This option appears only if a booklet finisher is installed Header Footer This inserts Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text in the specified header or footer location Margin Shift This increases or decreases the page margin by shifting the scanned image Touch F or to set the margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy is cropped Offset Pages This offsets pages between copies or between jobs Overlay This creates a watermark or message that overlays each page of your copy You can choose from preset messages or enter a custom message Paper Saver This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing where N stands for the number of pages For example 2 up would print two pages on a single page and 4 up would print four pages on a single page Separator Sheets This places a blank sheet of paper between copies pages or print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that c
5. e Resolution setting Adjust the quality of the scanned card Notes When scanning a card make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color and 400 dpi for black and white When scanning multiple cards make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color and 300 dpi for black and white e Print Borders Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Card Copy on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions Using MyShortcut Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Setting up and using the home screen applications 24 Create shortcuts on the printer home screen with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy fax or e mail jobs To use the application touch MyShortcut and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Multi Send Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Se Scan a document and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations Note Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP addres
6. Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Contact customer support a Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Change the paper size setting to match the paper loaded in the tray or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting Contact customer support Troubleshooting 321 Poor copy quality Action Clearthe error or status Go to step 2 message Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Does an error or status message appear Step 2 Go to step 3 Increase the scan Check the quality of the original document resolution setting for a higher quality output Is the quality of the original document satisfactory Step 3 Go to step 4 See Cleaning the If dark marks appear on prints then clean the scanner glass and the ADF scanner glass on glass using a clean lint free cloth dampened with water page 205 Is the scanner glass clean Step 4 Go to step 5 See Print quality Send a print job and then check for print quality problems problems on a From the Copy menu adjust the toner darkness page 301 b If the print remains faded then replace the toner cartridge Is the print quality satisfactory Step 5 Go to step 6 Place the document or Check the placement of the document or photo photo facedown on the Make sure that the document or photo is load
7. Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document Sides Duplex This option lets you make one or two sided copies from one or two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document Copies This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name Note Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number Punch This setting specifies whether copy jobs will have holes punched in them Staple This setting specifies whether copy jobs that contain multiple pages will be stapled Copying 83 Using the advanced options Advanced Duplex This specifies the document orientation one sided or two sided printing and type of binding Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Auto Center Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Sharpness settings before you copy the document Create Booklet This creates a one sided or two sided booklet Note This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Cover Page Setup This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets
8. Enable the user to set up the time zone Enable Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting View the NTP server address Enable the authentication setting Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 148 Settings menu General Settings menu Te Display Language Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display English Note Not all languages are available for all printers and you may Francais need to install special hardware for those languages to appear Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Greek Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Eco Mode Minimize the use of energy paper or specialty media Off Energy Notes e Off is the factory default setting This resets the printer to its Energy Paper By rap factory default settings Paper e Energy minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and paper specialty media e Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not ADF Loaded Beep Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded Enabled Note Enabled is the factory default setting Disabled
9. Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt i gt type the name of the recipient gt Search 3 Select the recipient s name and then touch Done Customizing e mail settings Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt type the e mail address gt Done gt Send as 3 Select the file type you want to send Note If you select Secure PDF then you will be prompted to enter your password twice 4 Touch Ve gt Send It Canceling an e mail e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding the e mail options Recipient s This option lets you enter the recipient of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you type a subject line for your e mail E mailing 87 Message This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name Original Size This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e mail When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can sca
10. Sides Duplex Specify whether an original document is two sided or one sided and then to specify 1 sided to 1 sided whether the copy should be two sided or one sided 1 sided to 2 sided Notes 2 sided to 1 sided AP cidaddoD sided e 1 sided to 1 sided The original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side e 1 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on one side while the copy will have print on both sides e 2 sided to 1 sided The original document has print on both sides while the copy will have print on just one side e 2 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on both sides and the copy will also have print on both sides Understanding the printer menus Paper Saver Off 2 up Portrait 2 up Landscape 4 up Portrait 4 up Landscape Print Page Borders Collate 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Punch Off 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Staple Off 1 staple 2 staples 158 Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether a border is printed Note Off is the factory default setting Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting Specify the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a staple hol
11. Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Security gt Confidential Print gt select the print job type Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 1 9 Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time Note The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Notes e Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs e You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel e All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs 2 Touch Submit Printing confidential and other held jobs Notes e Confidential and Verify print job
12. http support lexmark com e Connecting the printer e Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide and Quick Reference Guide The guides are Selecting and storing paper and specialty media available at http support lexmark com Loading paper Note These guides are also available in other PORI languages Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility Lexmark Accessibility Guide This guide is available at features of your printer http support lexmark com Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context sensitive information Notes e Help is automatically installed with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Learning about the printer 10 What are you looking for Find it here The latest supplemental information updates and customer Lexmark support Web site support http support lexmark com Documentation Note Select your country or region and then select Driver downloads your product to view the
13. LEXMARK MX910 Series User s Guide June 2014 Machine type s 7421 Model s 036 236 436 www lexmark com Contents 2 Contents Safety information sessesessessesssssssessessssesosossosssesososssesssosssessssssosssesssssssess Learning about the printer sessecssessessessessessescsessessoessesoesossoesssssoessessesseese Finding information about the Dinter sssrinin aie E E NANE 9 Connecting the printer to an outlet sssesessesssessessrersrrsresrrrsreseresererersrrseresessersrrssersseseerseesseneserseeseere 10 SCIOCUME AOCALION Ol Nne N eo O E EE cence neamens 10 PVC COLUMN ON S ora A nauseam ater asec cee nantes es aasaaeeemo ncaa eaeningnncees va aeceremaeteneaancnietenntues 11 Understanding the basic functions of THE SCANNEL ccccccsseccescccesccceeeceesnceceuceeeececeeeeeeesecessuscenseeeess 13 Using the ADF and scanner CIASS vcticiccnsssendandseinsdesmedudmsnvendieansbarsivaccdaedaswantivacediestooersisaseadeobantisesaaveivasewies 14 Understanding the printer control panel sessessescescecescoecesceecescescessecsess LD Ume iNe COnNTOIDANE eer et ae een E E E E A er EER 15 Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights cccccccecceesceeccesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 15 Understanding the home SCreeN cccccsscccsssecescccenecceucceeeeceeneceeeceensceeeeceeecteneeeeeucesaeessueeseneceseeeucenenes 16 Usm the touch screen DOTON Seunias 18 Settin
14. at blive udsat for laserstr len GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasers teelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden KINAYNOX Ek uon a partng aktivoBoAiac laser KATA tnv apaipeon twv kaoetwv Kar tnv AMAGHAALON Ths pav wong Anope yete tnv kOeon otnv aktiwvo o ia laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersug rz s fordulhat el a patronok elt vol t sakor s a z r szerkezet felbont sakor Ker lje a l zersug rnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstraling nar kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering for laserstr len NIEBEZPIECZE STWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera ONACHO Hegngnumoe nazepHoe n3nyyenne Npn n3B1e4EHHbIX KAPTPUAKaX n cHaTnn 6noknpoBkn U36erantTe Bosge cTBna na3epHbix nyye Pozor N
15. print troubleshooting envelope seals when printing 295 error reading flash drive 295 held jobs do not print 294 incorrect characters print 296 incorrect margins on prints 304 jammed pages are not reprinted 292 job prints from wrong tray 296 job prints on wrong paper 296 jobs do not print 299 Large jobs do not collate 297 multiple language PDF files do not print 297 paper curl 305 paper frequently jams 293 print job takes longer than expected 298 tray linking does not work 300 unexpected page breaks occur 300 printer 45 basic model 11 connecting to an outlet 10 fully configured 11 minimum clearances 10 moving 10 237 selecting a location 10 shipping 238 printer configurations 11 printer control panel adjusting brightness 200 indicator light 15 Sleep button light 15 Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete 280 printer hard disk disposing of 202 encrypting 204 removing 36 printer hard disk encryption 204 printer hard disk memory erasing 203 printer information where to find 9 printer IP address finding 20 printer is printing blank pages 306 printer messages x maintenance kit very low 80 xy 278 x page jam clear manual feeder 200 xx 245 x page jam detach the 3000 sheet tray and open door F 24y xx 252 x page jam open door C and clear all jammed media 2yy xx 245 x page jam open door D and clear all jammed media 24y xx 249 x page jam open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwi
16. x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and Pull out the tray and then remove the open door C 2yy xx jammed paper Door D trays x page jam open door D and clear all Open door D and then remove the jammed jammed paper 24y xx paper x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and Pull out the tray and then remove the open door D 24y xx jammed paper Doors C and F x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and Pull the 3000 sheet tray and then remove open door F 24y xx the jammed paper from the side of the tray Open door F and then remove the jammed paper Area G doors C J and H finisher x page jam open doors G H andJ and Open door G and then remove the jammed bin clear jammed paper 4yy xx paper Open door H and then remove the jammed paper Doors C and G finisher bin x page jam press latch beside door G and Slide the staple finisher to the left and then slide finisher to the left Leave paper in bin remove the jammed paper 40y xx Area G doors C J and H finisher x page jam open door H and rotate knob Open door H and then remove the jammed bin SD3 clockwise Leave paper in bin 426 xx 428 xx Clearing jams 245 x page jam clear jammed paper from multipurpose feeder 200 xx 1 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Open door C to remove any paper fragments Note Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to
17. 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt enter the number of copies gt Collate gt select the preferred order of pages gt 7S gt Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Separator Sheets gt select where you want to place the separator sheets Note Set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 to place separator sheets between copies If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job For more information see Collating copies on page 79 3 Touch ZS gt Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes e Make sure to set the paper size to letter legal A4 or JIS B5 e Make sure to set the copy size to 100 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Paper Saver gt select the output you want gt Si gt Copy It Note If Paper Saver is set to Off then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable Creating a custom copy job The custom copy job is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single
18. 3 Apply the changes Networking Notes e Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network For information on installing the wireless network adapter see the setup sheet that came with the adapter e A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Wi Fi Protected Access WPA and WPA2 are types of security used on a network Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network organize the following information before you begin Note If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers continue on to installing the printer e Avalid unique IP address for the printer to use on the network e The network gateway e The network mask e Anickname for the printer optional Note A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network You can choose to use the default printer nickname or assign a name that is easier for you to remember You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Notes e Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printe
19. CONTACTING customer SUD DOM irei er r E a 334 NOUCOS curcan E aaa aa a oe OD aloe ATOR i Ul ON A E E EE E E EEEE EEE TEASE A EA 335 oale aA SIE A AREE E E E ESEESE EEA E EE N E SA E EN 335 POWEr CONS UMDUO N aniar E T R 340 WOOK SEIERE EI EEEE A A E A E EEEE E E AE S A OOS Safety information 7 Safety information Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use this product with extension cords multioutlet power strips multioutlet extenders or other types of surge or UPS devices The power rating capacity of these types of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance property damage or potential fire Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a dang
20. Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Is the printer IP address correct Step 2 Go to step 3 Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on a Type the correct printer IP address inthe address field of your Web browser Note Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server Turn on the printer Troubleshooting 334 Action Step 3 ss to step 4 a your system Check if the network connection is working support person Is the network connection working Step 4 Go to step 5 Tighten the cable Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure connection For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure Step 5 Go to step 6 Contact your system Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers support person Note Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server Are the Web proxy servers disabled Step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address support in the address field Did the Embedded Web Server open Contacting customer support When you contact customer support yo
21. Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and white Note On is the factory default setting Resolution Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch dpi 75 dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specify the page orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Understanding the printer menus 176 Use To Original Size Specify the size of the original document Letter Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex Specify the page orientation of text and graphics Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the Best for content image 5 90 Notes Best for conten
22. Standard Bin Bin x Number of Copies 1 9999 Header Footer Location Off Date Time Page number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Overlay Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Off Custom Overlay Allow priority copies Allow Save as Shortcut Background Removal 4 to 4 160 Specify the bin to be used for the copy job Notes e Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x appears only when at least one optional bin is installed Specify the number of copies for the copy job Note 1 is the factory default setting Specify header and footer information and its location on the page For the location select from the following options e Top left Top middle Top right Bottom left Bottom middle Bottom right Notes e Off is the factory default setting for the location e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Save
23. The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved aE The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting 314 Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Action Step 1 a Depending on your operating system specify the tray or feeder from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog The is solved b Resend the print job a to step 2 Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper type From the control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu and weight to match to match the paper loaded in the tray the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 5 Go to step 6 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job D
24. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This sets the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a Fromthe home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Answer On b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch Submit Setting the outgoing fax name and number 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Fax Name field type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 Inthe Fax Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax
25. Understanding the printer menus Wireless menu 133 Enable IPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router Note On is the factory default setting Set the host name Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Enable DHCPv 6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Note This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless network adapter To access the menu navigate to Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless Wi Fi Protected Setup Start Push Button Method Start PIN Method Enable Disable WPS Auto detection Enable Disable Network Mode BSS Type Infrastructure Ad hoc Compatibility 802 11b g 802 11b g n Establish a wireless network and enable network security Notes Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router are pressed within a given period of time Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with WPS uses Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method Note Disable
26. and unplug any cables going into the printer Additional printer setup 28 1 Remove the connector cover 2 Remove the screws from the controller board access cover 3 Remove the access cover 4 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors Additional printer setup Option card connector Memory card connector Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector 29 Additional printer setup 30 6 Reattach the access cover 7 Tighten the screws on the access cover 8 Reattach the connector cover Installing a memory card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Unpack the memory card Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so may cause damage 3 Align
27. e TIFF Use to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document e XPS Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Scanning 116 Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper e Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings e Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings
28. gt Eco Mode gt Off Note Disabling Eco Mode may increase the consumption of energy or paper or both b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Reduce the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job and then resend the job Did the job print Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 4 The problem is solved Go to step 5 a Disable the Page Protect feature From the control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 5 The problem is solved Go to step 6 a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer Install additional printer memory and then resend the print job support Did the job print Troubleshooting 299 Print jobs do not print Action No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the document you are trying to print open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer Note If the printer is not the default printer then you must select the printer for each documen
29. linking trays 56 57 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 276 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 276 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 276 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 276 Load Multipurpose Feeder with custom string paper orientation 276 Load Multipurpose Feeder with custom type name paper orientation 277 Load Multipurpose Feeder with paper size paper orientation 277 Load Multipurpose Feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 277 Load staples 277 Load staples G11 G12 278 loading letterhead paper orientation 59 loading the multipurpose feeder 53 loading trays 51 lock security 202 M maintenance counter resetting 234 making copies using paper from selected tray 78 memory types installed on printer 202 memory card 27 installing 30 Memory full 38 278 Memory full cannot print faxes 278 Memory full cannot send faxes 278 menu settings loading on multiple printers 240 menu settings page printing 50 menus Active NIC 129 AppleTalk 134 Bin Setup 126 Confidential Print 143 Configure MP 121 Copy Settings 157 Custom Bin Names 125 Custom Names 125 Custom Scan Sizes 125 Custom Types 125 Default Source 118 diagram of 117 Edit Security Setups 141 Erase Temporary Data Files 144 E mail Settings 170 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 162 Finishing 186 Flash Drive 179 FTP Setti
30. ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s a l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cing Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e a l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit la d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit
31. 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup c Inthe Rings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers Click Submit Can you receive faxes Step 3 The problem is solved Replace the toner cartridge For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Can you receive faxes Fax and e mail functions are not set up Notes e Before you troubleshoot check if the fax cables are connected e The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e mail 326 Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Contact customer support Troubleshooting 327 a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Run initial setup gt Yes gt Submit Turn off the printer and then turn it back on The Select your language screen appears on the printer display Select a language and then touch ZS Select a country or region and then touch Next Select a time zone and then touch Next Select Fax and E mail and then touch Next Are fax and e mail functions set up Received fax has poor print quality Action The problem is solved Go to step 2 Ask the person who sent you the fax to a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory b Increase
32. 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame Note 8 is the factory default setting Set the parity for serial input and output data frames Note None is the factory default setting Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal Notes e Off is the factory default setting e DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing Specify SMTP server gateway and port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port SMTP Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to 5 30 send an e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Understanding the printer menus Use SSL Disabled Negotiate Required SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID amp Password Use Session E mail address amp Password Prompt User Device
33. 256 g m 16 68 Ib grain long paper The multipurpose feeder can feed paper weights between 60 256 g m 16 68 Ib grain long paper Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly and may cause jams Note Two sided printing is supported for 60 169 g m 16 45 Ib paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 200 Sheffield points Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper ma
34. 32 xy 283 Replace waste toner bottle 82 xy 283 Restore held jobs 283 Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 283 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 284 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx 284 Scanner maintenance required soon use ADF Kit 80 284 Scanner maintenance required use ADF Kit 80 284 Serial port x disabled 56 284 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 284 Some held jobs were not restored 284 Standard network software error 54 284 Standard USB port disabled 56 285 360 Supply needed to complete job 285 The device is operating in safe mode Some print options may be disabled or provide unexpected results 285 Too many flash options installed 58 285 Too many trays attached 58 285 Tray x paper size unsupported 286 Unformatted flash detected 53 286 Unsupported disk 286 Unsupported option in slot x 55 286 Unsupported USB hub please remove 2 73 Waste toner bottle nearly full 82 xy 286 Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 286 printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 289 internal print server 290 Internal Solutions Port 290 tray problems 291 USB parallel interface card 292 printer power switch 227 printer problems solving basic 287 printer security information on 204 printhead lens cleaning 206 printing canceling from the printer control pan
35. 7421 Model s 036 236 436 Edition notice June 2014 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For L
36. Auto is the factory default setting Enable two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Separator Sheets Off Before Job After Job Separator Sheet Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Fax Footer Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Fax Forwarding Print Print and Forward Forward Forward to Fax E mail FTP LDSS eSF 168 Sa Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify a bin for received faxes Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received Note 33600 is the factory default setting Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Note Print is the factory default setting Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded Notes e Fax is the factory default setting e This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax On Enable blocki
37. Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder 186 To Specify whether two sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs Notes e 1 sided is the factory default setting e You can set two sided printing from the printer software Define the way two sided pages are bound and printed Notes e Long Edge is the factory default setting This assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Specify the default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes e Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is
38. No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network Notes If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter and then look for the network name If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact your system support person To find the WPA WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network see the documentation that came with the access point see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point or consult your system support person Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard Before you begin make sure that e A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter e An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer e Active NIC is set to Auto To set this to Auto navigate to gt Network Ports gt Active NIC gt Auto gt Submit Note Make sure to turn off the printer then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on Additional printer setup 48 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Network Ports
39. Sizes is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x 6in Sides Duplex Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Black White Laser Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Understanding the printer menus Use Darkness Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Dialing Prefix Rules Establish a dialing prefix rule Prefix Rule x Automatic Redial 0 9 Redial frequency 1 200 Behind a PABX Yes No Enable ECM Yes Enable Fax Scans Driver to fax Yes Allow Save as Shortcut Dial Mode Tone Pulse Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 336
40. Specify the bin for FTP logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting e Bin x appears only when an optional bin is installed Enable the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Custom Job Scanning Scan Preview Allow Save as Shortcut Background Removal 4 to 4 Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 178 Enable an equal balance of colors in the scan
41. The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 6 Go to step 7 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 7 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support or your service representative Action a The problem is solved Step 1 a Move the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Are you printing on textured or rough paper Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems Do print irregularities still appear Troubleshooting 309 Print is too dark IN ABC DEF Action Step 1 a to step 2 The a is solved a From the Quality menu on the control panel reduce the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the a From the control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the following Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray e Specify the
42. Ue eagssdes tut sade daceees tiers r a AAEE EAA 225 REDlACING EME AD E SCAIN AG arraien E A hae te ereucaune deuce AEE masons 235 Movie the ON NN CO En crannenr e cca enantio nas diane oi ne nsce aesncu TE aerate eae tie eee 237 Managing the Drinte cic cswstececvcxsasesverssiodweutestecadscaueduiciwavesisaevenexeseeritieteevseoo Checking the virtual GIS OLAV saciceaciccswerdeins lace testaauri E E T N E E NE N 239 CANE UD E Malale S a A A 239 MIC WII MeO OES moriren EN E 239 Copying printer Settings to other PriNters ccccccecccecccsecccsecceeceuceceuceeuseeuseeeeeseeeseuseceuseeeeteesesseneeens 240 Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Servel cccccecccescessecssceeeceeeeeeeseeneeeeees 240 Restoring factory GETAUIT setting Sesine thor sdeteutines aosened A 241 Clearing Ja Sissin a a a an LA Avoiding VANS anain a a ee ese 242 Understanding jam messages and lOCAatiONns cccccscccssccesecccenceeeecenceceueceeuceenecceuceseuceseeeeeneeeeaeesenees 243 x page jam clear jammed paper from multipurpose feeder 200 XX cccesecccesscecseeeeseseseeeeeeees 245 x page jam open door C and clear all jammed paper Zyy XXx ccccseccesecceseceeeeceseceeseceeesceeeeceeness 245 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door C 2Zyy xx ccsseccsecesecesceeseceneeenceeeceeneeeeees 247 x page jam open door D and clear all jammed paper 24y xX cccccssseccsecceee
43. Ultra Fine best quality at a reduced speed 5 Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 Adjust the fax darkness and then touch Fax It Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports 3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Faxing 109 Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Block No Name Fax Notes e This option blocks all incoming fax
44. Understanding the printer menus 149 Quiet Mode Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer Notes On e Off is the factory default setting This supports the performance specifications for your printer e On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible This is best suited for printing text and line art e For optimal printing of color rich documents set Quiet Mode to Off e Selecting Photo from the print driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Run Initial setup Set the printer to run the setup wizard Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting After completing the No setup wizard the default becomes No Keyboard Specify a language and custom key information for the printer Keyboard Type keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and English symbols from the keyboard Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key x Understanding the printer menus 150 Paper Sizes Specify the default paper measurement US Metric Notes US is the factory default setting The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Changing this setting also changes the default setting for ea
45. Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data or a malfunction can occur Printing 72 2 From the control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Specify the number of copies to be printed and then send the job for printing Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive Supported flash drives and file types Notes e High speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported e USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported Recommended flash drives File type e Lexar FireFly 512MB and 1GB Documents e SanDisk Cruzer Micro 512MB and 1GB pdf e Sony 512MB and 1GB xps Images dcx git jpeg or jpg bmp Pcx tiff or tif png Printing from a mobile device To download a compatible mobile printing application visit www lexmark com mobile Printing 73 Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Printing confidential and other held jobs
46. a a Si 198 SAVING CNOT OV cuen n a N atur Abieewcug acoalabulanmennaeavenvaieueaes 199 ROCY CII siia e N E A E E E A es eek 200 Securing Ne OPIN USM ssccactexcctacescacucdscessesandcadeccceacsorcatecavencebinaisecistnsacueustcare2 A Usine the SECURITY lock Teatr Eon e lacinaieno dates nih ceaaewan ed adandbasn ee uawnaeceumatieansauueeedtere 202 Statement OP Volat Sesia a sno Mieseadacsaa tae ee anieezeaaaeeese 202 EFAS INS VOla CG MEMO ansan dade suashese a a E TEET 203 ERASING n n volatile MEMON ecarten a e aE E E taauevateows tees toxespenaeeseme ant ereas 203 Erasing Printer nara dis kmMeEemMO cenna a r E 203 Configuring printer hard disk encrypt Omnes sesers anr a TE a 204 Finding printer security INFOFMATION cccccecccescccescccseccesecaeeceeeseceeeeeuceenecceneeeeeceeaeeeeucesuseeseeeeseeneenes 204 Contents 5 Maintaining the printer sessesescessescecescescecescecsecescesceceecesseceecesceseessesese 20D cleanin ol ay t mal Sacri T A 205 Checking the status Of parts ANC SUPHIICS ccccecseccseccseccceseccencecsecceseeeenceeeceseueceeueeseneeeeeceseueeseeenss 210 Estimated NUMDbDEr Of remaining PAGS iis xacedee osn a E T E Ea 210 Ordenne SUPPE Saase T er A A ea 211 Ofgeringa 300K Maintenance Kit ssuriontinann e a a 212 STORING parts and SUD PICS adicssedaisasesacieesecatncsspreuintoa ree Aalawtade O eee 212 Replacin o SUPPE S ements tn ie efor re rtm tg rr NS A 213 Replacing the 300K maintenance
47. adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document Faxing 111 Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings e Sides Duplex This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page duplex This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax e Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Delayed Send This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date Color This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings e Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you fax the document e Custom Job This combines
48. and remove any packing material Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed Step 10 Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver Are the port settings correct Step 11 Check the installed printer driver Is the correct printer driver installed Step 12 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Is the printer working 288 Go to step 8 Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Turn off the printer remove all packing materials then reinstall the hardware options and then turn on the printer Use correct printer driver settings Install the correct printer driver Contact customer support Troubleshooting 289 Printer display is blank Action The problem is solved Go to step 2 Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel Does Ready appear on the printer display Step 2 The problem is solved Turn off the printer and then contact Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the customer support printer back on Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display Hardware and internal option problems Cannot detect internal option The problem is solved Go to step 2 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and th
49. are created with one file for each page Notes On is the factory default setting e This menu applies to all scan functions Enable the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Enter a base file name Note A maximum of 53 characters is allowed Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Understanding the printer menus Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Print Settings 182 Specify the contrast of the scanned image Note Best for content is th
50. before you scan the document e Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Note This option appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed e Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log Understanding the printer menus 117 Understanding the printer menus Menus list Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Stapler Test Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Print Demo Asset Report Event Log Summary Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Network Ports Active NIC Standard Network Standard
51. characters print 296 incorrect margins on prints 304 jammed pages are not reprinted 292 job prints from wrong tray 296 job prints on wrong paper 296 jobs do not print 299 Large jobs do not collate 297 multiple language PDF files do not print 297 363 paper curl 305 paper frequently jams 293 print job takes longer than expected 298 tray linking does not work 300 unexpected page breaks occur 300 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 306 characters have jagged edges 301 clipped pages or images 301 gray background on prints 303 horizontal voids appear on prints 303 print irregularities 307 print is too dark 309 print is too light 310 printer is printing solid black pages 307 repeating defects appear on prints 311 shadow images appear on prints 312 skewed print 313 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 314 streaked vertical lines 315 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 316 toner rubs off 317 toner specks appear on prints 317 transparency print quality is poor 318 uneven print density 318 white streaks on a page 318 troubleshooting printer options internal option is not detected 289 internal print server 290 Internal Solutions Port 290 tray problems 291 USB parallel interface card 292 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 329 partial document or photo scans 329 scan job was not successful 330 scanner unit does not close 331 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 331 two si
52. components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Unplug the hard disk interface cable from the controller board leaving the cable attached to the hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling out the cable 3 Remove the screws holding the hard disk in place Additional printer setup 38 4 Remove the hard disk Installing hardware options Order of installation A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Install the pr
53. consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or the Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unacceptable paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers e Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers e Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer e Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise lo
54. copy job The definition of a set depends on the scan source e If you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page e If you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty e f you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Custom Job gt On gt 7S gt Copy It Note When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears Copying 81 3 Load the next document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass and then touch Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed Note Change the scan job settings if necessary 4 Ifyou have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job Placing a header or footer on pages 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Header Footer gt select where you want to place the header or footer gt select the type of header or footer you want 3 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected and then touch Done 4 Touch Y and then press gt Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press Ea on the keypad 2 Touc
55. custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Auto Center On Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Sample Copy On 161 Sa Automatically center the content on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast used for the copy job Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Allow edge to edge scanning of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy Note 3 is the factory default s
56. custom type Paper name or a user defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server Caird Stock or from MarkVision Professional Transparency Notes Rough Cotton Labels Envelope e Paper is the factory default setting e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Recycled Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus Paper Card Stock Transparency Rough Cotton e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or Labels multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Envelope Notes e Paper is the factory default setting Custom Names menu Use To Custom Name x Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces Custom Type x in the printer menus Custom Scan Sizes menu Custom Scan Size x Specify a custom scan size name scan sizes and options The custom scan size Scan Size Name name replaces Custom Scan Size x in the printer menus Width 1 11 69 inches 25 297 mm Height 1 17 inches 22 432 mm Orientation Portrait Landscape 2 scans per side On Custom Bin Names menu Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin Understanding the printer menus 126 Use To Universal Setup menu Units of Measure Inches Millimeters Portrait Width 3 54 48 inches 89 9 1219 mm Portrait Height 5 5 48 inches 139 7 1219 mm Feed Direction Shor
57. e Using a flat head screwdriver reinstall the screws to lock the scanner bed in place Note Remove the screws after setting up the printer in another location Maintaining the printer 238 e f necessary use a cart with a surface large enough to support the full dimensions of the printer Keep the printer in an upright position e Avoid jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging Managing the printer 239 Managing the printer Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
58. emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e if PS SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu Understanding the printer menus Use NPA Mode Off Auto Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Standard Network Setup OR Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Reports menu 130 Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel Set the size of the network input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum si
59. firmware cards 27 Internal Solutions Port ISP 32 memory card 27 30 printer hard disk removing 36 options copy screen copy from 81 scale 82 options touch screen copy 81 e mail 87 88 fax 111 ordering 300K maintenance kit 212 photoconductor unit 211 Staple cartridges 212 ordering supplies toner cartridge 211 waste toner bottle 211 organizing cables 44 original size e mail options 87 scan options 115 output file type changing 86 scan image 115 ozone filter replacing 225 p page setup e mail options 88 fax options 111 Scan options 116 paper characteristics 60 different sizes copying 78 letterhead 61 preprinted forms 61 recycled 61 saving 80 selecting 61 storing 60 63 unacceptable 61 using recycled 198 Paper changes needed 279 paper characteristics 60 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 293 paper jams avoiding 242 paper jams clearing door C 245 247 door D 249 251 in 3000 sheet tray 252 in bottom ADF door 269 in door C 252 in door F 252 in multipurpose feeder 245 Paper Loading menu 123 paper size setting 51 Paper Size Type menu 118 paper sizes supported 63 Paper Texture menu 122 paper type setting 51 paper types supported by printer 66 paper weights supported by printer 66 Parallel x menu 136 Parallel port x disabled 56 279 parts checking status 210 checking from printer control panel 210 checking using the Embedded Web Server 210 storing 212
60. following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode e Touching the control panel home screen Opening the scanner cover The following actions wake the printer from Hibernate mode e Pressing the Sleep button until the printer wakes e Performing a power on reset using the main power switch a frend eer umes eners orses O C5 sarmon startaje deperaingon which maese e clear an Rese ton reset the defaut stings offen suchas copying ng or ania Ca pacari oneacine situs otne O Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Understanding the printer control panel 16 Indicator light Printer status Sleep button light Printer status Off The printer is off idle or in Ready state Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in a slow pulsing pattern Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customi
61. fuser area Clearing jams e Duplex area e Above the duplex area 5 Remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 6 Close the trays and door C 7 Slide the 3000 sheet tray back into place 249 x page jam open door D and clear all jammed paper 24y xx 1 Open door D and then remove the jammed paper Clearing jams 250 Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 3 Remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the tray and door D Clearing jams 251 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door D 24y xx a e i 1 Slide the 3000 sheet tray 2 Open door D and then remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 4 Remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 252 5 Close the tray and door D 6 Slide the 3000 sheet tray back into place x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door F 24y xx 1 Slide the 3000 sheet tray 2 Remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 253 3 Open door F and then remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 4 Close door F 5 Open door C Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer 6 Remove the jammed paper from any of the f
62. gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup 2 Select a wireless connection setup Search for networks Show available wireless connections Note This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs Enter a network name Manually type the SSID Note Make sure to type the correct SSID Wi Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup 3 Follow the instructions on the printer display Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup Before you begin make sure that e The access point wireless router is Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS certified or WPS compatible For more information see the documentation that came with your access point e A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter Using the Push Button Configuration method 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start Push Button Method 2 Follow the instructions on the printer display Using the Personal Identification Number PIN method 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireles
63. in the tray Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed problems Before loading the card stock on the tray flex and fan the card stock to loosen them Straighten the edges ona level surface Tips on using envelopes From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the envelopes loaded in the tray Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib paper or 25 cotton Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Paper and specialty media guide 59 Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes e Adjust the width guides to fit the widt
64. is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x 6in Sides Duplex Specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Best for content 5 90 Notes Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu setting applies to all scan functions Text Default Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the 5 90 image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 50 is t
65. landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Best for content 5 90 Notes Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu applies to all scan functions Text Default Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default Set the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and quality 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality 5 90 Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Scan Bit Depth 1 bit 8 bit Custom Job Scanning Scan Preview Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 181 E Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files
66. low 84 xy You may need to replace the photoconductor unit very soon For more information see Replacing a photoconductor unit on page 213 If necessary touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 280 Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing For more information visit http support lexmark com or contact customer support Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy Try one or more of the following e Check if the toner cartridge is missing If missing install the toner cartridge For information on installing the cartridge see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide e if the toner cartridge is installed then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the cartridge is defective Replace the toner cartridge Reinstall missing or unresponsive photoconductor 31 xy Try one or more of the following e If the photoconductor unit is missing then install it For more information see Replacing a photoconductor unit on page 213 e If the photoconductor unit is installed then remove and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then replace the defective photoconductor unit Remove defective disk 61 Remove a
67. manually Auto Answer Off When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones press 9 or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax e You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax Scenario 2 Digital Subscriber Line DSL Faxing 96 A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels voice and Internet Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel and Internet signals pass through the other channel This way you can use the same line for analog voice calls including faxes and digital Internet access To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices fax machine telephone answering machine in your network Interference causes noise and static on the telephone failed and poor quality faxes for the printer and slow Internet connection on your computer Note Contact your DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter To install a filter for the printer 1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack 2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer Connect the other end to the phone port on the DSL filter 3 To connect a telephone to the prin
68. menu screen This feature shows the Example path taken to arrive at the current menu Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu Number of Copies Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the number of copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the default setting Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears Understanding the printer control panel 18 Feature Description Status message bar e Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy e Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low e Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the Example home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 12541234123 225 Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrat
69. mm 12 x 18 in 11x17 279 4 x 431 8 mm 11 x 17 in 216 x 340 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in 140 x 216 mm Vv 5 5 x 8 5 in 76 2 x 76 2 mm 3 x 3 in to 320 x 1219 2 mm 12 6 x 48 in 7 3 4 98 x 191 mm Envelope 3 9 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98x225mm 3 9 x 8 9 in 10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm 4 1x9 5 in 1 Supported only in short edge orientation 2 Supported only in long edge orientation 3 Supports paper size without size sensing 4 Supported only if the width is from 139 7 mm 5 5 in to 320 mm 12 6 in and the length is from 148 mm 5 83 in to 458 mm 18 in Note Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296 9 mm 11 69 in and the length is up to 1219 2 mm 48 in Set the paper size to Universal Paper and specialty media guide 65 Paper size Dimensions Standard Standard 2x500 2500 sheet 3000 sheet Multipurpose Two sided DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 3 x 8 7 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 4 x 9 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 in Other 98 x 162 mm Envelope 3 9 x 6 3 in to 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 in 1 Supported only in short edge orientation 2 Supported only in long edge orientation 3 Supports paper size without size sensing 4 Supported only if the width is from 139 7 mm 5 5 in to 320 mm 12 6 in and the length is from 148 mm 5 83 in to 458 mm 18 in Note Banner is supported in the multipu
70. of its allotted space No is the factory default setting full alert level determines if the space occupied by log equals or exceeds the value of the full alert level 90 is the factory default setting E mail log exported alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when there is a log exported No is the factory default setting E mail log settings changed alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log setting is toggled No is the factory default setting Log line endings specifies how line endings will be handled in the log file depending on the operating system in which the file will be parsed or viewed LF n is the factory default setting To View the current date and time settings for the scanner Enter the date and time Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format Select the time zone Note GMT is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Custom Time Zone Setup DST Start Week DST Start Day DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Enable NTP 147 Set the scanner to use the applicable daylight saving time DST start and end times associated with the scanner Time Zone setting Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting
71. of the From the printer control panel set the paper size in the Paper menu to following match the paper loaded in the tray e Specify the paper size from the tray Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from support Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Paper curl Action Step 1 C to step 2 oe the width and Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for length guides the size of the paper loaded Are the width and length guides positioned correctly Step 2 Go to step 3 Specify the paper type From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight from the menu to match the paper loaded in the tray tray settings to match the paper loaded in the Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in may the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Troubleshooting Action Yes Step 4 Go to step 5 a Remove the paper from the tra
72. paper b Resend the print job type texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type texture and weight specified in the tray settings Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Step 4 From the control panel Go to step 5 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on Are you printing on textured or rough paper Troubleshooting Action Yes Step 5 Go to step 6 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Step 6 Go to step 7 a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Step 7 Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems Is the print still
73. printer to a network USB ports Attach a keyboard 7 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing Loss of data or a malfunction can occur Setting up the printer software Installing the printer 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package 2 Run the installer and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 3 For Macintosh users add the printer Note Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu Adding available options in the print driver For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Run gt type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click B or click Start and then click Run b Type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Select the printer you want to update and then do either of the following e For Windows 7 or later select Printer properties e For earlier versions select Properties Additional printer setup 46 3 Navigate to the Configuration tab and then select Update Now Ask Printer 4 Apply the changes For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer and then select Options amp Supplies 2 Navigate to the list of hardware options and then add any installed options
74. receptacle on the controller board are color coded Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly Tray problems The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following Check for paper jams or misfeeds Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray If you are printing on custom size paper then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Make sure paper lies flat in the tray b Check if the tray closes properly Is the tray working Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a Turn off the printer then wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Is the tray working Step 3 Go to step 4 Reinstall the tray For Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer more information see the setup documentation that came with the tray Print a menu settings page and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Features list Is the tray listed in the menu settings page Troubleshooting 292 Action Step 4 Check if the tray is available in the printer driver Note If necessary manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 45 Is
75. restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other info
76. reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Securing the printer 202 Securing the printer Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked When locked the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporar
77. s Guide where to find 204 emission notices 337 341 342 346 347 Empty the hole punch box 273 emptying the hole punch box 209 encrypting the printer hard disk 204 enlarging a copy 79 envelopes tips on using 58 environmental settings conserving supplies 198 Eco Mode 199 Hibernate mode 199 printer display brightness adjusting 200 Sleep Mode 200 Erase Temporary Data Files menu 144 erasing hard disk memory 203 erasing non volatile memory 203 erasing volatile memory 203 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 273 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 273 Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 46 Ethernet port 44 Ethernet setup preparing for an 46 exhaust filter replacing 225 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 26 EXT port 44 exterior of the printer cleaning 205 e mail canceling 86 e mail alerts low supply levels 239 paper jam 239 setting up 239 e mail options darkness 87 message 8 7 original size 87 page setup 88 recipient s 86 resolution 87 Save As Shortcut 87 Send As 87 subject 86 e mail screen advanced options 88 options 87 88 E mail Settings menu 170 e mail shortcut creating using the control panel 85 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 85 e mail sending using a shortcut number 86 e mailing configuring e mail settings 84 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 85 using a shortcut number 86 using the address book 86 e mailing a docu
78. scan job canceled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk Install a hard disk with higher capacity Disk must be formatted for use in this device From the printer control panel touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk e Install a hard disk with higher capacity Empty the hole punch box Try one or more of the following e Empty the hole punch box Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the print job Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported USB device is inserted Remove the USB device and then insert a supported one Error reading USB hub Remove hub An unsupported USB hub has been inserted Remove the USB hub and then install a supported one Troubleshooting 274 Fax memory full From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear th
79. speed 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the control panel navigate to the menu for the port settings b Locate the menu for the serial port settings and then adjust the settings if necessary c Save the settings 2 From your computer open the printers folder and then select your printer 3 Open the printer properties and then select the COM port from the list 4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt and then type devmgmt msc Verifying printer setup When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following e Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and then install it again e Network setup page If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to v
80. the fax scan resolution if possible c Resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Troubleshooting 328 Action Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly e Print a network setup page or menu settings page and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section b Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup c Inthe Max Speed menu click one of the following e 2400 e 4800 e 9600 e 14400 e 33600 d Click Submit and then resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer Replace the toner cartridge When Cartridge low 88 xy appears replace the cartridge and then resend the fax Is the fax print quality satisfactory Troubleshooting 329 Solving scanner problems Cannot scan from a computer Action Yes No Go to step 3 Go to step 2 Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer display before scanning a job Does Ready appear before scanning the job Step 2 Clear the error Go to step 3 Turn off the printer
81. the notch 1 on the memory card with the ridge 2 on the connector qy Additional printer setup 31 4 Push the memory card straight into the connector and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place Installing an optional card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 2 Unpack the optional card Warning Potential Damage Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so may cause damage 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins 1 on the card with the holes 2 on the controller board Additional printer setup 32 4 Push the card firmly into place Warning Potential Damage Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board Note The entire le
82. the printer 4 Close door C 5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 6 Reload the paper x page jam open door C and clear all jammed paper 2yy xx 1 Open door C Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer 2 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it Clearing jams 246 e Fuser area Below the fuser area Duplex area e Above the duplex area Clearing jams 247 3 Open the standard trays and then locate the jammed paper 4 Remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 5 Close the trays and door C x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door C 2yy xx 1 Slide the 3000 sheet tray Clearing jams 248 2 Open door C Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer 3 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it e Fuser area Below the
83. the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On e Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine For example if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings then set the printer to pick up after six rings This way the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received If the call is a fax then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call Faxing 94 e If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer Otherwise the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically Setup 3 Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack 3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer Faxing 95 Tips for this setup e This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service If you have distinctive ring service then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer Otherwise the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically e If you have only one telephone number on your line then you need to set the printer to receive faxes
84. the scanner does not respond 332 tips card stock 58 labels paper 59 on using envelopes 58 transparencies 60 tips on using envelopes 58 tips on using letterhead 59 toner cartridge ordering 211 replacing 221 toner cartridges recycling 201 toner darkness adjusting 71 Too many flash options installed 58 285 Too many trays attached 58 285 touch screen buttons 18 transfer module replacing 230 transfer roller replacing 233 transparencies copying on 77 tips 60 Tray x paper size unsupported 286 trays linking 56 57 loading 51 unlinking 56 57 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 333 cannot open Embedded Web Server 333 checking an unresponsive printer 287 contacting customer support 334 fax and e mail functions are not set up 326 solving basic printer problems 287 the scanner does not respond 332 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 320 partial document or photo copies 320 poor copy quality 321 poor scanned image quality 329 scanner unit does not close 331 troubleshooting display printer display is blank 289 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 322 can receive but not send faxes 325 can send but not receive faxes 326 cannot send or receive a fax 323 received fax has poor print quality 327 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 293 troubleshooting print envelope seals when printing 295 error reading flash drive 295 held jobs do not print 294 incorrect
85. to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Forms and Favorites 3 Click Add and then customize the settings Notes See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 e Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and
86. too dark Print is too light Action Yes Step 1 Go to step 2 a From the Quality menu on the control panel increase the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Step 2 Go to step 3 From the control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Contact customer 310 es The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved as The problem is solved Change the paper type texture and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray Troubleshooting 311 Action Yes Te Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Step 4 From the control panel Go to step 5 change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on Step 5 Go to step 6 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Step 6 Go to step 7 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print j
87. using genuine Lexmark 211 parts ordering 300K maintenance kit 212 PCL Emul menu 192 PDF menu 191 Personal Identification Number method using 48 phone splitter 96 Photoconductor low 84 xy 279 photoconductor unit ordering 211 replacing 213 Photoconductor very low 84 xy 279 photos copying 76 358 placing separator sheets between copies copying 80 port settings configuring 49 PostScript menu 192 power cord socket 44 power switch printer 227 preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network 46 print driver hardware options adding 45 print irregularities 307 print job canceling from computer 75 print quality cleaning the scanner glass 205 replacing a photoconductor unit 213 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 306 characters have jagged edges 301 clipped pages or images 301 gray background on prints 303 horizontal voids appear on prints 303 print irregularities 307 print is too dark 309 print is too light 310 printer is printing solid black pages 307 repeating defects appear on prints 311 shadow images appear on prints 312 skewed print 313 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 314 streaked vertical lines 315 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 316 toner rubs off 317 toner specks appear on prints 317 transparency print quality is poor 318 uneven print density 318 white streaks 318 print quality troubleshooting cleaning the charger 206 cleaning the printhead lens 206 Index
88. 00 Custom Job scanning Note 5 is the factory default setting 165 To Lighten or darken the output Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Specify the number of minutes between redials Note 3 is the factory default setting Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Note No is the factory default setting Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Note Yes is the factory default setting Fax files that are scanned at the printer Note On is the factory default setting Allow the print driver to send fax jobs Note Yes is the factory default setting Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specify a dialing sound Note Tone is the factory default setting Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Note 33600 is the factory default setting Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Understanding the printer menus Background Removal 4to4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0
89. 08 sending a fax at a scheduled time 106 setting the date and time 104 setting the fax number 104 setting the outgoing fax name 104 viewing a fax log 108 FCC notices 337 342 346 feet Stabilizing 38 file name scan options 115 finding more information about the printer 9 finding printer IP address 20 finisher supported paper sizes 67 supported paper types 67 supported paper weights 67 Finishing menu 186 firmware card 27 flash drive printing from 71 scanning 114 Flash Drive menu 179 flash drives supported file types 72 font sample list printing 74 Forms and Favorites setting up 22 forwarding faxes 110 FTP FTP options 115 FTP address creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 113 FTP address scanning to using the control panel 113 FTP options FTP 115 FTP screen advanced options 116 FTP Settings menu 175 G General Settings menu 148 green settings Eco Mode 199 Hibernate mode 199 H hardware options adding print driver 45 held jobs 73 printing from a Macintosh computer 73 printing from Windows 73 Help menu 196 Hibernate mode using 199 hiding icons on the home screen 21 holding faxes 109 hole punch 82 hole punch box emptying 209 home screen customizing 21 hiding icons 21 showing icons 21 home screen applications configuring 22 finding information 22 home screen buttons and icons description 16 HTML menu 195 icons on the home screen hiding 21 showing 21 Image menu 196 importing a confi
90. 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F 15 to 85 RH Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787 800 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown Notices 340 DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel sera liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstraling n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordningen er sl et fra Undg
91. 2 Insert the flash drive into the USB port 3 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive 4 Adjust the scan settings and then touch Scan It Scanning 115 Understanding the scan options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 File Name This option lets you type a file name for the scan image Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name Note Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number Original Size This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document Resolution This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Send As This option lets you set the output type for the scan image Select one of the following e PDF Use to create a single file with multiple pages The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file
92. 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 166 Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast in the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the sharpness of a fax Note 3 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Temperature 4 to 4 Enable Color Fax Scans Off by default On by default Never use Al
93. 4 scanning to a flash drive 114 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 112 using the control panel 113 scanning to network destinations 112 security modifying confidential print settings 74 Security Audit Log menu 145 security lock 202 security settings information erasing 203 security Web page printer security information 204 selecting a location for the printer 10 selecting paper 61 Send As e mail options 87 scan options 115 sending a fax using the computer 106 sending a fax using the control panel 105 sending an e mail using the control panel 85 sending fax at a scheduled time 106 Serial x menu 138 Serial port x disabled 56 284 serial printing setting up 50 Set Date and Time menu 146 setting paper size 51 paper type 51 TCP IP address 131 setting the fax number 104 setting the outgoing fax name 104 setting the Universal paper size 51 setting up e mail alerts 239 setting up fax country or region specific 99 digital telephone service 98 DSL connection 95 standard telephone line connection 91 VoIP connection 96 setting up fax and e mail functions 326 setting up serial printing 50 Setup menu 184 shipping the printer 238 shortcuts creating copy screen 77 e mail 85 fax destination 107 FTP address 113 FTP destination 112 showing icons on the home screen 21 sides duplex copy options 82 Sleep Mode adjusting 200 362 SMTP server not set up Contact system
94. 8 Reinstall the waste toner bottle 9 Close the bottom front door Replacing the staple cartridge Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple finisher Note The staple finisher is supported only in select printer models 1 Press the latch on the staple finisher and then slide the finisher to the left Maintaining the printer 216 2 Remove the staple cartridge holder 4 Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder Maintaining the printer 217 5 Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clicks into place 6 Slide the finisher back into place Maintaining the printer 218 Replacing the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher 1 Open door H and then pull out the booklet maker Hatem no iis 2 Remove the staple cartridge holder Maintaining the printer 219 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the cartridge holder 6 Push the booklet maker back into place and then close the door Maintaining the printer 220 Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple hole punch finisher 1 Open door H 2 Remove the staple cartridge holder Maintaining the printer 221 4 Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder 6 Close door H Replacing the toner cartridge 1 Open the top front door Maintaining the printer 222 3 Unpack the new toner cartridge remove the packing material and then shake the cartridge to redistribute the tone
95. CL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Notices 337 Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expen
96. Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same tray e Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel e Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam messages and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display Open the doors covers and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam Notes e When Jam Assist is set to On the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed page has been cleared Check your printed output for blank pages e When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto the printer reprints jammed pages However the Auto setting reprints jammed pages only if adequate printer memory is available 9 1 7 IN ul Area name Automatic document feeder ADF Door C Door D Door F Trays Clearing jams 244 Area name s Doo epon o wes Area name Control panel message What to do ADF x page jam press latch at area E to open Open the ADF top door and then remove ADF s top cover 28y xx the jammed paper Multipurpose feeder x page jam clear jammed paper from the Remove the jammed paper from the multipurpose feeder 200 xx feeder Door C trays x page jam open door C and clear all Open door C and then remove the jammed jammed paper 2yy xx paper
97. Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Setting up and using the home screen applications 23 Setting up Card Copy Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com SS You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page saving paper and showing the information on the card in a more convenient manner 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Card Copy 3 Change the default scanning options if necessary Default tray Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images e Default number of copies Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application is used e Default contrast setting Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the scanned card is printed Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically e Default scale setting Set the size of the scanned card when printed The default setting is 100 full size
98. Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of Notices 344 an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num
99. O CUIES ueiaire anan ve Sone staan rasa nee tide weacomaeteces T oni ected eae 107 CUSTOMIZING Tax SO INE Srini o O eae 108 Cancelie aax JO Dri ean ses git aaa a a E 109 Holdinge and TORWANGING Taxe Sceire teSrocec lou tiecccitaactatecaiGeansaualcantdeadacsaeee edeuiaeeuets neers euaneeiamen 109 Understanding EMG AXODUIOMS sesccader neste see E eae eae ue 110 SCANNE oaio cers odaune esas ceuescaunessavarenlenwasessiaeumeescaenvoueirtiesetsse aise Le UT gy Aes ere alee tah Cou 0 gee Nene mene see PNR am TEP SY TY RS CT PIP a TE 112 SCAM LO ai MPa ANOS S vee esse tas io Buca atest alee ensoakici abe Ghensansehae aeeiawede tne awn Tecate 112 Scanning tO ad COMPDULEL OF flash GIVE sescncsnrcsastieie a ossswacaieslaue A a A a tanec 114 Understanding thescan OPTIONS siiceviessesecdehi ue scceid initio ce sagneubaptonatdanand a a 115 Understanding the printer MenuG ccccccccsccsscsscscsccccccccccscscscccccccsesscsceL LZ Menus IST cacxssiudahantewetamtuinunusaslecaaainvataeusadaussenue tun acanasiy ne dexesaaaiausenanee saben eae ceeded heute mmauhisenalUavanielsedes 117 Paper WCU i sare upintuh ess once a hase E davec ene tt A E E 118 FC OES MIC MU crocs tenet n Ar O OAT A EA ETA N 128 NetWwork Ports MENU seerne E TT AT RN OAN 129 SECUN MENU eaa TAE aT E OTO 141 SOUNE MENU aana a A a a ea camseduaeeuesieco 148 Saving money and the ENVIFONMEN cceccecccececscscscscccscccscccsscecscscscseseL OG Savine DaDel AMG TONE eraras aa aa aa
100. Printing Side with the Paper orientation letterhead Trays One sided Faceup Load the sheet with the top edge toward the back of the tray Two sided Facedown Load the sheet with the top edge toward the front of the tray Multipurpose feeder One sided Facedown Load the sheet with the top edge on the left side Two sided Faceup Load the sheet with the top edge on the right side Paper and specialty media guide 60 Tips on using transparencies e From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the transparencies loaded in the tray e Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities e Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers e Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems e Before loading transparencies flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together e When printing on large volumes of transparencies make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval of at least three minutes between batches to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin You can also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20 Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these factors before printing on them Weight The printer trays can feed paper weights between 60
101. Reports menu 128 reserve print jobs 73 printing from a Macintosh computer 73 printing from Windows 73 resetting the maintenance counter 234 resolution e mail options 87 fax options 110 scan options 115 resolution fax changing 108 Restore held jobs 283 restoring factory default settings 241 RJ 11 adapter 99 rollers replacing 227 S safety information 7 8 Save As Shortcut copy options 82 e mail options 87 scan options 115 Saving paper 80 scan image output file type 115 scan options darkness 115 filename 115 Original size 115 page setup 116 resolution 115 Save As Shortcut 115 Scan Preview 116 Send As 115 Scan Preview scan options 116 scan preview fax options 111 Index scan screen content source 115 content type 115 Scan to Computer setting up 114 Scan to Network setting up 24 using 112 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 329 partial document or photo scans 329 scan job was not successful 330 scanner unit does not close 331 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 331 scanner functions 13 Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 283 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 284 scanner glass cleaning 205 using 14 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx 284 Scanner maintenance required soon use ADF Kit 80 284 Scanner maintenance required use ADF Kit 80 284 scanning to an FTP address 113 scanning toa computer 11
102. SISISISIS lt 60 a a L yY a Ooy ae Ooy E ae ov O y 1 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks or staples the paper but does not punch holes in it 3 Paper is supported but the finisher does not stack staple or punch holes in it 4 Paper is supported only for 2 hole punch gt Paper is supported only if the paper size is between 210 x 279 4 mm 8 27 x 11 in and 320 x 457 2 mm 12 6 x 18 in _ paper types Paper type Staplefinisher finisher Staple hole punch finisher _ hole punch finisher Booklet Bookletfinisher 1 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 60 2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple it 3 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 4 Paper is supported only if the finisher punches holes or stacks the paper but does not staple it gt Paper is supported only if the finisher staples or folds the paper Paper and specialty media guide 69 Paper type Staple finisher finisher Staple hole punch finisher hole punch finisher Booklet Booklet finisher i a em a a a menor C a a E a a a momen meter poom a ay a 1 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to pr
103. This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail e Orientation This specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides Duplex and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding This specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Note This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed Using the advanced options Select from the following settings e Advanced Imaging This adjusts the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you e mail the document e Custom Job This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Note This option appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed e Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Transmiss
104. USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Erase Temporary Data Files Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Option Card Menu2 A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears 1 Depending on the printer setup this menu appears as Standard Network or Network x This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding the printer menus 118 Paper menu Default Source menu Default Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Notes Multipurpose Feeder Manual Paper Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting Manual Envelope From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting If two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have the same settings then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray Paper Size Type menu Tray x Size Specify the paper size loaded in each tray A4 A5 AG e Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Notes JIS B5 JIS B4 e if two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have the same settings then the trays are automatically linked The m
105. Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Security menu Edit Security Setups menu 141 Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP server Notes e Disabled is the factory default setting e When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Notes e None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and User Initiated E mail e Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Edit Backup Password Create a backup password Use Backup Password Notes On e Off is the factory default setting for Use Backup Password Password e This menu item appears only if a backup password exists Understanding the printer menus Edit Building Blocks Internal Accounts NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Active Directory LDAP LDAP GSSAPI Password PIN Edit Security Templates list of available templates Edit Access Controls Administrative Menus Function Access Apps Configuration Management Solutions Cancel jobs at the Device 142 Edit settings for Internal Acc
106. Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components Ordering a toner cartridge Notes e The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19752 standard e Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield Part name Part number High Yield Toner Cartridge 64GOHOO Ordering a photoconductor unit Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause photoconductor unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner ltem Part number Photoconductor unit 54GO0P00 Ordering a waste toner bottle ltem Part number Waste toner bottle 54G0W00 Maintaining the printer 212 Ordering staple cartridges ltem Part number Staple cartridges 25A0013 Ordering a 300K maintenance kit Note To replace the parts included in the maintenance kit se
107. administrator 284 SMTP Setup menu 140 Some held jobs were not restored 284 Stabilizing feet 38 Standard Network menu 129 Standard network software error 54 284 Standard USB menu 134 Standard USB port disabled 56 285 staple 82 staple cartridge in booklet finisher replacing 218 staple cartridge in staple finisher replacing 215 staple cartridge in staple hole punch finisher replacing 220 staple cartridges ordering 212 statement of volatility 202 status of parts checking 210 status of supplies checking 210 storing paper 63 parts 212 supplies 212 storing print jobs 73 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 314 streaked vertical lines appear on prints 315 streaks appear 318 Substitute Size menu 122 supplies checking status 210 checking from printer control panel 210 checking using the Embedded Web Server 210 conserving 198 storing 212 using genuine Lexmark 211 using recycled paper 198 supplies ordering photoconductor unit 211 staple cartridges 212 toner cartridge 211 Index waste toner bottle 211 Supply needed to complete job 285 supply notifications configuring 240 supported flash drives 72 supported paper sizes 63 finisher 67 supported paper types 66 finisher 67 supported paper weights 66 finisher 67 switch printer 227 T TCP IP menu 131 telecommunication notices 342 343 344 345 The device is operating in safe mode Some print options may be disabled or provide unexpected results 285
108. age and cancel the scan job e Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job e Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job Replace x maintenance kit 0 estimated pages remain 80 xy The printer is scheduled for maintenance For more information go to the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact your service representative and then report the message Replace missing photoconductor 31 xy Install the missing photoconductor unit to clear the message For more information see Replacing a photoconductor unit on page 213 Replace missing waste toner bottle 82 xy Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the message For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Replace missing cartridge 31 xy Install the missing cartridge to clear the message For more information see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 221 Troubleshooting 283 Replace paper pick rollers in paper source use parts and instructions in tray 1 or tray 2 compartment 80 Try one or more of the following e Replace the pick rollers and then touch Rollers replaced on the contro
109. ail and the printer then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Step 11 The problem is solved Contact customer Scan the original document one page at a time a Dial the fax number b Scan the document one page at a time Can you send or receive a fax Can receive but not send faxes The problem is solved Go to step 2 Check if the printer is in Fax mode From the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode and then send the fax Can you send faxes Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Load the original document properly into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass Can you send faxes Step 3 The problem is solved Contact customer Set up the shortcut number properly e Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number that you want to dial e Dial the telephone number manually Can you send faxes Troubleshooting Can send but not receive faxes Action The problem is solved Check the tray or feeder If empty then load paper in the tray or feeder Can you receive faxes Step 2 The problem is solved Check the ring count delay settings a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as
110. al Rough Heavy Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Rough Cotton Texture Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded Rough Custom x Texture Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded Smooth Notes Normal e Normal is the factory default setting Rough e The options appear only if the custom type is supported Paper Loading menu Card Stock Loading Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock Duplex as the paper type Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections e Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system Understanding the printer menus Use Recycled Loading Duplex Off Glossy Loading Duplex Off Heavy Glossy Loading Duplex Off Labels Loading Duplex Off Bond Loading Duplex Off Letterhead Loading Duplex Off Preprinted Loading Duplex Off Colored Loading Duplex Off Light Loading Duplex Off Heavy Loading Duplex Off Rough Cotton Loading Duplex Off Custom x Loading Duplex Off Notes 124 To Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing
111. anner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Open the scanner cover Maintaining the printer 206 2 Wipe the areas shown with a soft or lint free cloth 3 Close the scanner cover Cleaning the charger and the printhead lens 1 Open the bottom front door Maintaining the printer 207 2 Remove the waste toner bottle es 3 Locate the white tab Maintaining the printer 208 5 Remove the printhead wiper 7 Put the wiper back to its holder 8 Reinstall the waste toner bottle 9 Close the bottom front door Maintaining the printer 209 Emptying the hole punch box 1 Open door H 2 Remove and empty the hole punch box Maintaining the printer 210 3 Reinstall the hole punch box 4 Close door H Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets o
112. appropriate support site Live chat support Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your Voice support printer E mail support Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region e In the U S See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or go to http support lexmark com e In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with this printer Connecting the printer to an outlet Connect the power cord to the printer and then to a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet Note The electrical outlet may look different depending on your country or region Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options then leave enough room for them also It is important to e Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily acces
113. are or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts Safety information 8 This product produces ozone during normal operation and is equipped with a filter designed to limit ozone concentrations to levels well below the recommended exposure limits To avoid high ozone concentration levels during extensive usage install this product in a well ventilated area and replace the ozone and exhaust filters as indicated in the product maintenance instructions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regular
114. ary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified ins
115. atch the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded Contact customer 312 Sa The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved a Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings Troubleshooting Action Yes Step 3 Go to step 4 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints Step 5 Contact customer Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems Do shadow images still appear on prints Skewed print Yes Go to step 2 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed Step 2 Contact customer a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray support b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed 313 a
116. ating in Safe Mode Some print options may be disabled or provide unexpected results Touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing Too many flash options installed 58 Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue on the control panel to continue printing e Remove the extra flash memory 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many trays attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 286 Tray x paper size unsupported Replace with a supported paper size Unformatted flash detected 53 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing Format the flash memory Note If the error message remains then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced Unsupported disk Remove the unsupported printer hard disk and then insert a supported one Unsupported option in slot x 55 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board and then re
117. ax Settings menu is set to On Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts Print a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Understanding the printer menus 129 Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes e Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 e Make sure that the flash memory or hard disk is working and installed correctly Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Active NIC Allow the printer to connect to a network Auto list of available network cards Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed Standard Network or Network x menu Note Only active ports appear in this menu Ce Energy Efficient Ethernet Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the Ethernet Enable network Disable Note Enable is the factory default setting PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL
118. ble only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding the printer menus 138 ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Serial x menu Note This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed E Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup me
119. by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings 3 From the Other Settings menu click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items you want to be notified on and then type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer network and supplies 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Managing the printer 240 Copying printer settings to other printers Note This feature is available only in network printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Cl
120. cable is securely attached to the printer and the cable securely to the computer print server option or other network device printer and the computer print server option or other Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer P network device print server option or other network device Step 3 Go to step 4 Connect the power Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and grounded electrical outlet a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 4 Turn on the switch or Go to step 5 Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker reset the breaker Action Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker Step 5 Connect the printer Go to step 6 Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible Power cord directly to power supplies or extension cords a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords Step 6 Unplug the other Go to step 7 Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet electrical equipment and turn on the printer If the printer does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6 Are the other electrical equipment working Step 7 The pr
121. cation on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms e Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing e Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib e Multiple part forms or documents Paper and specialty media guide 63 For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality e For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 percent Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 24 C 65 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent Store paper in cartons on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor e Store individual packages on a flat surface e Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages e Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean dry and flat Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide info
122. ceived through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding the printer menus USB Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Mac Binary PS ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YYY YYY 135 Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately e The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Set the size of t
123. cess can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer is unavailable for other user tasks 4 Touch Back and then exit the Configuration menu Note The printer performs a power on reset and then returns to normal operating mode Securing the printer 204 Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a hard disk installed 1 Turn off the printer 2 From the control panel hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears 3 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption erases the contents of the hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer is unavailable for other user tasks e A status bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk is encrypted the printer returns to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back and then exit the Configuration menu Note The printer performs a power on reset and then returns to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional s
124. ch input source in the Paper Size Type menu Scan to PC Port Range Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking port range firewall Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Displayed Information Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the Left side home screen Right side For the Left side and Right side menus select from the following Custom Text x options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name Notes e P Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Understanding the printer menus Use Displayed Information continued Black Toner Displayed Information continued Waste Toner Bottle Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors 151 Customize the displayed information for Black Toner Select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes e Do not display is the factory default setting for When to display e Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors Select from the following options Display Yes No Message to display Default Alternate Default text
125. ciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti Kaesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU pohinoduetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir pv a essi vara er samr mi vid grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminiu
126. content type e mail settings 87 fax options 111 control panel 15 factory defaults restoring 241 control panel printer indicator light 15 Sleep button light 15 controller board accessing 27 copies copy options 82 copy options collate 82 copies 82 darkness 82 Save As Shortcut 82 sides duplex 82 copy quality adjusting 79 copy screen advanced options 83 content source 82 content type 82 options 81 82 Copy Settings menu 157 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 320 partial document or photo copies 320 poor copy quality 321 poor scanned image quality 329 scanner unit does not close 331 copying canceling a copy job 81 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 77 on both sides of the paper two sided 79 copying different paper sizes 78 copying from selected tray 78 copying multiple pages on one sheet 80 copying on both sides of the paper two sided 79 copying on letterhead 77 copying on transparencies 77 copying photos 76 copying to a different size 78 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 107 creating an e mail shortcut using the control panel 85 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 112 Custom Bin Names menu 125 custom job copying 80 Custom Names menu 125 custom paper type assigning 57 custom paper type name creating 57 Custom Scan Sizes menu 125 Custom Types menu 125 354 customer support contacting 334 D darkness copy options 82
127. create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing 71 Adjusting toner darkness 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu 2 Adjust the toner darkness setting and then save the changes Printing from a flash drive or mobile device Printing from a flash drive Notes e Before printing an encrypted PDF file you are prompted to type the file password from the control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears on the printer display After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive
128. ction is then updated Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DTR DTR DSR XON XOFF XON XOFF DTR DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting Notes DTR is the factory default setting XONXOFF DTRDSR XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Understanding the printer menus 140 Baud Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 1200 2400 A800 e 9600 is the factory default setting Notes 9600 e 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 19200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option
129. ctive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number India E Waste notice This product complies with the India E Waste Management and Handling Rules 2011 which prohibit use of lead mercury hexavalent chromium polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0 1 by weight and 0 01 by weight for cadmium except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer Notices 339 ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark Temperature information Ambient operating temperature 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F Shipping temperature 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F Storage temperature and relative humidity
130. d Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings 3 From the Fax Forwarding menu select Print Print and Forward or Forward 4 From the Forward to menu select Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF 5 Inthe Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu 6 Click Submit Understanding the fax options Resolution This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Select one of the following Standard Use this when faxing most documents e Fine 200 dpi Use this when faxing documents with small prints e Super fine 300 dpi Use this when faxing documents with fine details e Ultra fine 600 dpi Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos Darkness This option lets you
131. d enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Faxing 91 Choosing a fax connection Scenario 1 Standard telephone line Setup 1 Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack Tips for this setup e You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On or manually Auto Answer Off e If you want to receive faxes automatically Auto Answer On then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you want Faxing Setup 2 Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine Connected to the same telephone wall jack To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack 3 Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer 92 Faxing 93 Connected to different wall jacks To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack Tips for this setup e If you have only one telephone number on your line then you need to set
132. d to modem fax is disabled 278 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 279 Open door H and remove paper from beneath area H10 279 Paper changes needed 279 Parallel port x disabled 56 279 Photoconductor low 84 xy 279 Photoconductor very low 84 xy 279 Printer had to restart Last job may be incomplete 280 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 280 Reinstall missing or unresponsive photoconductor 31 xy 280 Remove defective disk 61 280 Remove packaging material area name 280 Remove packaging material open door C remove metal clips remove all screws from scanner Carriage 280 Remove paper from linked set bin name 281 Remove paper from all bins 280 Remove paper from bin x 281 Remove paper from standard output bin 281 Replace x maintenance kit O estimated pages remain 80 xy 282 Replace all originals if restarting job 281 Replace cartridge O estimated pages remain 88 xy 281 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 281 Replace jammed originals if restarting job 282 Replace missing cartridge 31 xy 282 Replace missing photoconductor 31 xy 282 Replace missing waste toner bottle 82 xy 282 Replace paper pick rollers in paper source use parts and instructions in tray 1 or tray 2 compartment 80 283 Replace photoconductor 0 pages remain 84 xy 283 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 283 Replace unsupported photoconductor
133. d then resend the print job support Is the print density uneven Vertical voids appear on prints Leading edge 318 n Set the paper type to Transparency The problem is solved a The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting 319 a to step 2 Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a From the control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Check if you are using a recommended type of paper a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Remove the photoconductor unit and then reinstall it Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 5 Go to step 6 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved Action Step 1 a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern The o is solved b Resend the print job Replace
134. ded copying 79 Index U understanding the home screen buttons and icons 16 uneven print density 318 Unformatted flash detected 53 286 Universal paper size setting 51 Universal Setup menu 126 unlinking trays 56 57 Unsupported option in slot x 55 286 Unsupported USB hub please remove 2 73 USB port 44 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 292 using Forms and Favorites 70 using Hibernate mode 199 using recycled paper 198 using the address book e mailing 86 using the ADF copying 76 using the automatic document feeder ADF 14 using the scanner glass 14 copying 76 using the touch screen buttons 18 Utilities menu 190 V verify print jobs 73 printing from a Macintosh computer 73 printing from Windows 73 vertical voids appear 318 viewing reports 239 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 239 voice mail setting up 91 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP fax setup 96 voids appear 318 VoIP adapter 96 volatile memory 202 erasing 203 364 volatility statement of 202 W waste toner bottle ordering 211 replacing 223 Waste toner bottle nearly full 82 xy 286 Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator 286 Wireless menu 133 wireless network configuration information 46 wireless network setup using the Embedded Web Server 49 wireless setup wizard using 47 X XPS menu 191
135. default setting Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders Notes Off is the factory default setting None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Understanding the printer menus 195 HTML menu Font Name Joanna MT Set the default font for HTML documents Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not Antique Olive Apple Chancery Arial MT Avant Garde Bodoni Bookman Chicago Clarendon Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Font Size 1 255 pt Scale 1 400 Orientation Portrait Landscape Lubalin Graph specify a font Marigold MonaLisa Recut Monaco New CenturySbk New York Optima Oxford Palatino StempelGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery NewSansMTJA NewSansMTCS NewSansMTCT NewSansMTKO Set the default font
136. ding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Finding the IP address of the computer For Windows users 1 Inthe Run dialog box type cmd to open the command prompt 2 Type ipconfig and then look for the IP address For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu select Network 2 Select your connection type and then click Advanced gt TCP IP 3 Look for the IP address Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address e From the printer control panel home screen e From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Setting up and using the home screen applications 21 Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field 3 Press Enter Note If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Customizing the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbe
137. disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking e To link trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray e To unlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type on page 51 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Loading paper and specialty media 57 Creating a custom name for a paper type 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 2 Type acustom paper type name and then apply the changes 3 Touch Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
138. document and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer For more information see Setting up Scan to Computer on page 114 Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server For more information see Scanning to an FTP address on page 113 Scan to Network Scan a document and then send it to a network shared folder For more information see Setting up Scan to Network on page 24 Setting up and using the home screen applications 22 Activating the home screen applications Finding information about the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 20 For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications do the following 1 Go to http support lexmark com 2 Click Software Solutions and then select either of the following Scan to Network This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application e Other Applications This lets you find information about the other applications 3 Click the Manuals tab and then select the document for the home screen application Setting up Forms and Favorites Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link
139. e Disabled 5 255 155 Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the rest of the print job Notes e 90 is the factory default setting e When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting e Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job Notes e 40 is the factory default setting e Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes e 30 is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a formatted printer hard disk is installed Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered Note Reboot always is the factory default setting Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform Note 2 is the factory default setting Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting
140. e 32 b Printa menu settings page and then check if the internal print server is listed in the Installed Features list Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list Step 2 The problem is solved Check the cable and the internal print server connection Use the correct cable and then check if it is securely connected to the internal print server Does the internal print server operate correctly Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Yes Go to step 2 Make sure the Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed a Install the ISP For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 32 b Print a menu settings page and then check if the ISP is listed in the Installed Features list Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list 290 e Check if the internal print server Is supported by the printer Note An internal print server from another printer may not work with this printer Contact customer support E Check if you have a supported ISP Note An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer Troubleshooting 291 Action Step 2 Check the cable and the ISP connection a Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board Note The ISP solution interface cable and the
141. e ISP in the same location where the hard disk was located on the controller board a Align the posts of the plastic mounting bracket with the holes on the controller board cage and then press the bracket on the cage until it clicks into place Additional printer setup 35 b Install the ISP on the bracket Additional printer setup 36 7 Align the standoffs of the hard disk with the holes on the ISP and then press the hard disk down until the standoffs click into place t N ae tro oey eees0 seer gt N 8 Insert the plug of the hard disk interface cable into the connector on the ISP and then connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board aie i a mM Removing a printer hard disk Note Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer Additional printer setup 37 A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic
142. e control panel touch Continue to clear the message and then print using a different tray e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 275 Insert hole punch box Insert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Insert Tray x Try one or more of the following e Insert the specified tray into the printer e Cancel the print job Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data in the printer memory e Install additional printer memory Insufficient memory to collate job 37 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save clear the message and continue printing Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Insufficient memory some held jobs
143. e control panel screen Note 100 is the factory default setting Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the factory default setting Set the amount of light from the standard bin Notes e Dim is the factory default setting if Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper Bright is the factory default setting if Eco Mode is set to Paper or Off Understanding the printer menus Audio Feedback Button Feedback Volume 1 10 Show Bookmarks Yes Allow Background Removal Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Contact Name Location Alarms Alarm Control Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm Hole Punch Alarm 153 Set the audio volume for the buttons Notes e On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback e 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note Yes is the factory default setting Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB jobs Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image is removed Scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected then the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes e Job level is the factory default setti
144. e factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify a default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Collate 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Set a default paper source for all print jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page Note 1 sided is the factory default setting Specify whether prints are stapled Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is instal
145. e mail options 87 fax options 110 scan options 115 date and time fax setting 104 daylight saving time faxing 105 Default Source menu 118 Defective flash detected 51 272 delayed send fax options 111 device and network settings information erasing 203 different paper sizes copying 78 different size copying to 78 Digital Subscriber Line DSL fax setup 95 digital telephone service fax setup 98 directory list printing 75 Disk full 62 273 Disk full scan job canceled 273 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 273 display troubleshooting printer display is blank 289 display control panel 15 display printer control panel adjusting brightness 200 disposing of printer hard disk 202 distinctive ring service fax connecting to 104 documents printing from Macintosh 70 from Windows 70 door C paper jams clearing 245 247 door D paper jams clearing 249 251 DSL filter 95 E Eco Mode setting 199 Index Edit Security Setups menu 141 embedded solutions information erasing 203 Embedded Web Server accessing 20 adjusting brightness 200 checking the status of parts 210 checking the status of supplies 210 copying settings to other printers 240 creating a fax destination shortcut 107 creating an FTP shortcut 112 creating e mail shortcuts 85 initial fax setup 90 modifying confidential print settings 74 problem accessing 333 setting up e mail alerts 239 Embedded Web Server Security Administrator
146. e message e Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator Try either of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax setup If the message appears again after completing the setup then contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax setup If the message appears again after completing the setup then contact your system support person Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 Try one or more of the following e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray or feeder and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the control panel e Make sure that the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings e Check the length and width guides and make sure that the paper is loaded properly in the tray or feeder e From th
147. e mode mode Note If Ready Hex appears on the display then turn off the printer and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode Is the printer in Hex Trace mode Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved a From the control panel select Standard Network or Network x and SUpport then set PCL SmartSwitch or PS SmartSwitch to On b Resend the print job Do incorrect characters print Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper No The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 a Depending on your operating system open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog and then specify the paper type b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 4 The problem is solved Contact customer a Check if the trays are not linked support b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Troubleshooting Large jobs do not collate Action The problem is solved a Fr
148. e punch finisher is installed Enable or disable the staple finisher Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed Understanding the printer menus Use Original Size Letter Legal Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in ID Card Copy To Source Tray x Auto Size Match Multipurpose Feeder Transparency Separators Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Sheet Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Darkness 1 9 159 Se Specify the paper size of the original document Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specify the paper source for copy jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Place a sheet of paper between transparencies Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to On a blank page is placed between transparencies Place a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Lighten or darken the print for the copy job Note 5 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Output Bin
149. e the instruction sheet that came with each part ltem Part number Maintenance kit 40X9669 Storing parts and supplies Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to e Direct sunlight e Temperatures above 35 C 95 F e High humidity above 80 e Salty air e Corrosive gases e Heavy dust Storing the rollers Your printer comes with replacement rollers stored in the compartment inside the standard trays After you purchase new rollers make sure to store them in the compartments inside the trays Note For proper disposal of parts and supplies see Recycling on page 200 Maintaining the printer 213 Replacing supplies Replacing a photoconductor unit 1 Open the bottom front door 2 Remove the waste toner bottle Maintaining the printer 214 3 Unlock the photoconductor unit 4 Remove the photoconductor unit Unpack the new photoconductor unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 6 Install the photoconductor unit Maintaining the printer 215 7 Lock the photoconductor unit
150. e to clear the message Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk e From the printer control panel touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs Scanner disabled by admin 840 01 Print without the scanner or contact your system support person Troubleshooting 284 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 840 02 Try one or more of the following Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job Note This attempts to enable the scanner Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 2yy xx Remove the jammed paper from the scanner Scanner maintenance required use ADF Kit 80 The printer is scheduled for maintenance For more information go to the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact your service representative and then report the message Scanner maintenance required soon use ADF Kit 80 Contact customer support and then report the message The printer is scheduled for maintenance Serial port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the specifi
151. ears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Understanding the printer menus Use Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4to 4 Use cc bcc On 174 Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the
152. ebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstralning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering f r laserstr len ER 4 BRR RY PE LOC AE aR ERODE F o JER BERIE E RAA RAR R EEA LO ENR ERE SOMRER TE EAE Fo ER U kY vE Ian ARE y 7 SBMICROEL AZARO PHO SNEF STOL P HICSRSRWEDIC UTS KAU Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic One sided 865 MX910de 925 inputs MX911de MX911dte 985 MX912de MX912dxe Two sided 790 MX910de 850 MX911de MX911dte 890 MX912de MX912dxe Copy The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy 880 MX910de 950 MX911de original documents MX911dte 1000 MX912de MX912dxe Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet but the power switch is turned off The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com fo
153. ed memory total page count alarm settings timeouts control panel language TCP IP address status of supplies status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number of printed pages Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly Menu Settings Page Stapler Test Note This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers and when there is more than one network option installed Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Note This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log in the Fax Settings menu is set to On Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Fax Call Log Note This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log in the F
154. ed facedown on the a in the scanner glass in the upper left corner Upper IE CORNER Is the document or photo loaded correctly Step 6 Go to step 7 Change the Content Check the copy settings Type and Content From the Copy screen check if the Content Type and Content Source san ali t settings are correct for the document being scanned mane me OCU being scanned Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned Step 7 Go to step 8 The problem is solved Check for patterns on prints a From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt select a lower setting Note Make sure that no scaling is being selected b Resend the copy job Do patterns appear on prints Troubleshooting 322 Action Yes No Step 8 Go to step 9 The problem is solved Check for missing or faded text on prints a From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings e Sharpness lIncrease the current setting e Contrast Increase the current setting c Resend the copy job Do prints have missing or faded text Step 9 Contact customer The problem is solved support Check for washed out or overexposed output a From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings of the following Background Removal Reduce the current setting e Shadow Detail Reduce the current setting c R
155. ed pages remain 80 xy 282 Replace all originals if restarting job 281 Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy 281 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 281 Replace jammed originals if restarting job 282 Replace missing cartridge 31 xy 282 Replace missing photoconductor 31 xy 282 Replace missing waste toner bottle 82 xy 282 Replace paper pick rollers in paper source use parts and instructions in tray 1 or tray 2 compartment 80 283 Replace photoconductor 0 pages remain 84 xy 283 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 283 Replace unsupported photoconductor 32 xy 283 Replace waste toner bottle 82 xy 283 replacing parts pick feed separator rollers 227 transfer module 230 transfer roller 233 replacing supplies staple cartridge in booklet finisher 218 staple cartridge in staple finisher 215 staple cartridge in staple hole punch finisher 220 toner cartridge 221 waste toner bottle 223 replacing the ADF scan pad 235 replacing the exhaust filter 225 replacing the ozone filter 225 replacing the pick feed and separator rollers 227 replacing the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher 218 replacing the staple cartridge in the staple finisher 215 361 replacing the staple cartridge in the staple hole punch finisher 220 replacing the toner cartridge 221 replacing the transfer module 230 replacing the transfer roller 233 replacing the waste toner bottle 223 reports viewing 239
156. ed serial port e Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled e From the printer control panel set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial x menu Some held jobs were not restored From the printer control panel touch Continue to delete the indicated job Note Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible SMITP server not set up Contact system administrator From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message appears again then contact your system support person Standard network software error 54 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to continue printing e Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Troubleshooting 285 e Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message Standard USB port disabled 56 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Enable the USB port From the printer control panel navigate to Network Ports gt USB Buffer gt Auto Note The printer discards any data received through the USB port Supply needed to complete job Do either of the following e Install the missing supply to complete the job Cancel the current job The device is oper
157. eeeeoianna ier 25 Exporting and importing a CONFIQZUrATION ccccsccccseccescceeecesececseceeeceeuceeuceeeeeteneeceueeeeeeeeuceenecseneneeeenes 26 Additional printer SetUp sessecescesceccscecoecescescecoscecceccesescecesceccecoesescessesee 27 installing internal O DUO S iicsensisancceaevesestcossnsesibasssnossanosssansansdemsncessancainapeadoe shew canmivsandosskesannurantsinosentoamneonss 27 Mee A FWOD 0 0 a gt aan ee nen ane en ener te ee en E nee eee 38 PN WG ela alae 6 a ene eee A E er eee ee er eee 44 Contents 3 Serine UP tie PNE SOMA O asra a a a a 45 INGE WON E rner AEAN 46 Verifying PNNLer set UD ernan T E T ee 50 Loading paper and specialty media sesseesescescsesoeceecoecoeccesceceeseeseessess DL SELLING The Papel SIZO and LY De naina E A aaa seen 51 Configuring Universal paper SCULINGS aesciarekcceusarn ani aersieis tttwnnsavgieetsailedyeldenciawnsaseceeuis R T 51 OA GINS CRAY Senere aTi E N N 51 Loadine THe mMUIDUrDOSETEEdE onmi n E E T E a 53 EVIE and URUNKINE CRAY Sarrea oi N a E EE eeeed iegenee 56 Paper and specialty media guide ssessessessessesoesoessessessessessessssssssssssssses DS Usine specialty mMedidressserters a e a a aa usados aa a a A 58 Papere delne Enba E O a 60 Supported paper sizes types ANG WEIGNTHS cccccsecceccceeceeeccnceeuceucceeeeeeceeneeeuceeeeeeeeceeseeueeeneeeeeeeses 63 Printinge forms and a document sioner A E daca leseuadas biber a A a 70 P
158. eessseceeceeeceseeeeenees 249 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door D 24y XX csccccsseeccssececeeeeesceeseeeesseeeneees 251 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door F 24y XX ccscccssscccessececeesceceeeeesencessenees 252 x page jam open doors G H and J and clear jammed paper Leave paper in bin 4yy xx 255 x page jam press latch to access area G Leave paper in bin 4Oy XxX cececssececeeeesseceeeeeeeeeeees 258 x page jam press latch to access area G and clear jammed staples Leave paper in bin 402 93 261 x page jam open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise Leave paper in bin 426 xx 428 xx 264 x page jam press latch at area E to open ADF s top cover 28y XxX cccccssseccssscceececeeeeeceeeeeseseeees 269 Contents 6 MROUDIESMOOUING esc tecanisaetesensec Sevancscutucasidancestsisuasqueradaneqsinnsussgnenadestenaesene A Understandine tne printer Messages sivcsstess reciccaceds toseh cease aed T eaaed aden eaters 271 SGIVINE DORINLCT DOO OMS manri uiAieseencethatoasatenesaatooarialuataae E 287 SOIVINE DPI DO CNS scsi chcr cadet Ses eet a Sesto nessa Sena ce acetate 294 SONNE CODY DODICI nra r a eae akoaes slaw N 320 SOVNE TIX TO FNS airesin E N a 322 SOIVINE scanner OroDIEMS eirenrisaniie rria E A T NA 329 SOIVINE Nome Screen application ProDIEMIS aosan e A ea 333 Embedded Web Server doesnot ONC Meriani eneee A E A EEE 333
159. el 75 directory list 75 font sample list 74 forms 70 from a mobile device 72 from flash drive 71 from Macintosh 70 from Windows 70 menu settings page 50 network setup page 50 printing a directory list 75 printing a document 70 printing a font sample list 74 printing a menu settings page 50 printing a network setup page 50 Index printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 73 from Windows 73 printing forms 70 printing from a flash drive 71 printing from a mobile device 72 publications where to find 9 Push Button Configuration method using 48 Q Quality menu 188 R recipient s e mail options 86 recycled paper using 61 198 recycling Lexmark packaging 201 Lexmark products 200 toner cartridges 201 reducing a copy 79 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 280 Reinstall missing or unresponsive photoconductor 31 xy 280 Remote Operator Panel setting up 25 Remove defective disk 61 280 Remove packaging material area name 280 Remove packaging material open door C remove metal clips remove all screws from scanner Carriage 280 Remove paper from linked set bin name 281 Remove paper from all bins 280 Remove paper from bin x 281 Remove paper from standard output bin 281 removing printer hard disk 36 repeat print jobs 73 printing from a Macintosh computer 73 printing from Windows 73 repeating defects appear on prints 311 Replace x maintenance kit O estimat
160. en navigate to Copy gt Sides Duplex gt select the preferred two sided method Note For the preferred method the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 2 sided to 2 sided if you have two sided original documents and you want two sided copies 3 Touch Y gt Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be scaled from 25 to 400 of the original document size 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen touch Copy 3 From the Scale area touch or F to decrease or increase the value by 1 Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying 4 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt specify the content type of the document gt ZS 3 Specify the content source of the document and then touch ZS gt Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print the copies as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated Copying 80
161. en turn on the printer Does the internal option operate correctly Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the internal option to the controller Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board see oard a Turnoffthe printer using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board Step 3 Go to step 4 Reinstall the internal option Print a menu settings page and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page Troubleshooting Action Step 4 a Check if the internal option is selected It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 45 b Resend the print job Does the internal option operate correctly Internal print server does not operate correctly Action Yes Go to step 2 Reinstall the internal print server a Remove and then install the internal print server For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on pag
162. ens and encumbrances As part of your warranty service and or replacement Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and or unauthorized products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces to stop working Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation
163. entry Alternate text entry Notes e No is the factory default setting for Display e Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Understanding the printer menus Use Home screen customization Change Language Copy Copy Shortcuts Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Apps Bookmarks Jobs by user Forms and Favorites Card Copy Scan to Network MyShortcut Multi Send Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Screen Brightness 20 100 One Page Copy On Output Lighting Normal Standby Mode Off Dim Bright 152 Change the icons that appear on the home screen For each icon select from the following options Display Do Not display Notes e Display is the factory default setting for Copy Fax E mail FTP Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Forms and Favorites Card Copy Scan to Network MyShortcut and Multisend Do not display is the factory default setting for Change Language Copy Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles and Apps Bookmarks and Jobs by user Format the printer date Notes e MM DD YYYY is the U S factory default setting e DD MM YYYY is the international factory default setting Format the printer time Note 12 hour A M P M is the factory default setting Specify the brightness of th
164. er of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn off the printer and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet e Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer e ifthe printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays then remove the trays e Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down e Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer e Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardw
165. erify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected Ifthe status isNot Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Loading paper and specialty media 51 Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 242 and Storing paper on page 63 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Submit Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal paper size setting is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup 2 Select a unit of measure and then set the portrait width and height 3 Apply the changes Loading trays CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed unt
166. erse Landscape Help menu Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails and configuring the settings Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings Understanding the printer menus 197 Menu item Description Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality defects and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies Saving money and the environment 198 Saving money and the environment Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the sett
167. ervice through a cable provider Setup 1 Printer is connected directly to a cable modem 1 0 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the 4 port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem Note The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active VolP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port 3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer Notes e To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active plug an analog telephone into the telephone port and then listen for a dial tone If you hear a dial tone then the port is active e f you need two telephone ports for your devices but do not want to pay additional cost then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port You can use a phone splitter Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter e Make sure you use a phone splitter not a line splitter To make sure that you are using the correct splitter plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone Faxing 99 Setup 2 Printer is connected to a wall jack cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
168. es full alert level 1 99 E mail log exported alert No Yes E mail log settings changed alert No Yes Log line endings LF n CR r CRLF r n Set Date and Time menu Use Current Date and Time Manually Set Date and Time Time Zone 146 T Specify how audit logs are configured Notes e Admin s e mail address determines if administrators are automatically notified of certain log events This setting can have one or more e mail addresses separated by commas Digitally sign exports determines if the printer automatically signs each exported security log Off is the factory default setting Severity of events to log records the severity value of each event 4 is the factory default setting Remote Syslog non logged events determines if the printer sends events to the remote server that have a severity level greater than the value of the Severity of events to log setting No is the factory default setting E mail log cleared alert determines if the printer sends an e mail to the administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer control panel or EWS No is the factory default setting E mail log wrapped alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when log entries are wrapping No is the factory default setting E mail full alert determines if the printer sends the administrator an e mail when the log fills a certain amount
169. es that have a private caller ID or have no fax name e Inthe Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling a fax job 1 From the control panel touch Cancel Job or press x on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press x on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Holding Faxes 3 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following e Off e Always On e Manual e Scheduled 4 Ifyou selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes Faxing 110 c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 5 Click Ad
170. esend the copy job Do pages show washed out or overexposed prints Solving fax problems Caller ID is not shown Action Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is The problem is solved Contact customer subscribed to the caller ID service Notes e f your region supports multiple caller ID patterns then you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 e The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns e Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Does the caller ID appear Troubleshooting 323 Cannot send or receive a fax Action Step 1 Check if an error or status message appears on the display Clearthe error or status Go to step 2 message Is there an error or status message on the display Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the power Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and grounded electrical outlet a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 3 Go to step 4 Turn on the printer Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears PER appears on the on the display aa Is the printer turned on and does Ready appear on t
171. etting Create a sample copy of the original document Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Understanding the printer menus 162 Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line General Fax Settings Use To Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax Fax ID Fax Name Fax Number Enable Manual Fax Memory Use All receive Mostly receive Equal Mostly send All send Cancel Faxes Allow Don t Allow Caller ID Off Primary Alternate Fax number masking Off From left From right Digits to Mask 0 58 Specify how the fax is identified Note Fax Number is the factory default setting Set the printer to fax manually which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset Notes e Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function e Off is the factory default setting Define the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs Notes e Equal is the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts Mostly send specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies tha
172. ettings Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt S 3 Touch Copy to and then select a new size for the copy 4 Touch Y gt Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt S 3 Touch Copy to and then select the tray containing the paper type you want to use 4 Touch Y gt Copy It Copying different paper sizes Copying onto mixed paper sizes 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt A 3 Touch Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt Ai gt Copy It Copying onto a single paper size 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt S 3 Touch Copy to gt Letter gt A gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected Copying 79 Copying on both sides of the paper two sided 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home scre
173. event them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 60 2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple it 3 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 4 Paper is supported only if the finisher punches holes or stacks the paper but does not staple it gt Paper is supported only if the finisher staples or folds the paper Printing 70 Printing Printing forms and a document Printing forms Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 22 1 From the home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites gt select the form from the list gt enter the number of copies gt adjust other settings 2 Apply the changes Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or
174. exmark technical support visit http support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com 2014 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software Program and any related documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7207 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U S Government end users a only as Commercial Items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Notices 336 Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes P
175. exture of the plain paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded Notes e Normal is the factory default setting e The options appear only if card stock is supported Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded Note Rough is the factory default setting Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 123 Use To Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded Rough Letterhead Texture Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Preprinted Texture Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Colored Texture Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Light Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Norm
176. f numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status gt More Details Estimated number of remaining pages The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors such as actual document content print quality settings and other printer settings Maintaining the printer 211 The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer initial estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization test methods and page content Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 Ordering supplies To order parts and supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark Authorized Supplies Dealers in your area In other countries or regions go to the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Note All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper
177. fax logs Notes e On is the factory default setting e Logs print after every 200 fax jobs Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax name returned Note Remote Station Name is the factory default setting Enable access to the Fax Job log Note On is the factory default setting Enable access to the Fax Call log Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Speaker Settings Speaker Mode Always Off On until Connected Always On Speaker Volume High Ringer Volume All Rings Single Ring Only Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double Rings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only E mail Settings menu E mail Server Setup Subject Message File Name Send me a copy Max e mail size Size Error Message Limit destinations Web Link Setup 170 Specify the bin for the printed fax logs Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Specify the mode of the speaker Note On until Connected is the factory default setting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made Control the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Control the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting Specify ring patter
178. for all print jobs with Glossy as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy Glossy as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Colored as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Light as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or Cotton as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Custom x as the paper type Note Custom x Loading is available only when the custom type is supported e Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system Understanding the printer menus 125 Custom Types menu Use Custom Type x Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default
179. for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications e There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt Notices 345 e The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbe
180. g transparencies on page 60 Paper and specialty media guide 67 Standard Standard 2 x 500 2500 sheet 3000 sheet Multipurpose ADF Scanner 500 sheet 500 sheet sheet tray feeder tray Tray 1 tray Tray 2 Heavy Glossy V s xo D ka et lt xe D Labels Vinyl Labels Bond DSG Goce Geo Hh ONGS Ft cesses eee Envelope roumemelope eT ee eT eT E E AEA memet vo v v v v vo viv pemet y y v v v viv fv crear Vv ov vw v v y fv smew ov v v v v i pewa y vo vv v v viv iv pocos y v vw v v viv fv esme Vv vj v v v Vv iviv Paper is supported for two sided printing i ee ee i en el el KLKISISISISIS KLKISISISISIS KLKISISISISISIS KLKISISISISIS KLKISISISISISIS lt lt lt 2 Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 60 Paper sizes types and weights supported by the finishers The printer engine supports 60 256 g m 16 68 Ib paper weights Note When a finisher is installed the standard finisher bin becomes the default bin even for print jobs that do not require finishing Paper and specialty media guide Supported paper sizes Paper size Staple finisher Staple hole punch Staple hole punch Booklet finisher finisher bin 1 finisher bin 2 Letter 12 x 18 11x17 v V Vv Vv v V v v KISI
181. g up and using the home screen applicationsS sesssesssesseessesseesse 20 Finding the IP address OT the printe sssscccassieridosnccdercdevsaceasecdanctsasinedsatsanieverdiberassmenessasedereteoentesansivesisedeis 20 Finding the IP address ofthe compute ossriiirensesioisrn eron EREE EE EEE EEE 20 Accessing the Embedded Web Servel ccccsseccsseccseccccneccenecesuceeececeuceeeuceeecesecessucesucsseeteneeeseeegeetees 20 Customizing the NOME SCreen essssssssrsernerrereerrerersresresrrsresresrrrsrrstrstrstrstrstrsstestnstrstestrseeseesesseeseeereseenut 21 Understanding the different applications cccccccssccssccesseccseccescccencceceeenecceuceeueeseneeeeeceseectsueeeeeeneetenes 21 Activating the home Screen applications ccccsscsosscscssccusccsuscesssccusessuscouseseuseseussesensesenussussenstsuseuss 22 Finding information about the home Screen ApplicatiOnsS ccsseccccssesceccesecccceeecccseeeceeseuseeeseecessenseeeseeesees 22 Serting Up Forms and eV ONE rissa sancti panse Ena iE neice EAEE NEO EEEE cea eens esate paca nate ote TA 22 Se ES US C cas is sacesepc eee sasavnceadenramerdacieaa EE E A E 23 ESF MY OO UNE e icaaautaaetwe oncecucaumtssconsenrsie E N EE E OA T EOE O EO 23 SCHNE UNO MONE EN osna A ENEE E E saben tan denian geet 24 SECIS Up Scan COIN CPW OE K sesioa ana E i aaa a Ea 24 Setting Up Remote Operator Pane ltectainctcc neice eis nen tieaaieaa canis oun voted sauces onas sont iuededeesaneeseosaen
182. get Set the storage location for downloads RAM Notes Flash Disk e RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in the RAM is temporary e Storing downloads in a flash memory or in a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in the flash memory or printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off e This menu item appears only if an optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed Resource Save Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM when the printer receives a print job that requires more than the available memory Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs On sets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory then Memory Full 38 appears onthe printer display but downloads are not deleted Print All Order Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed Alphabetical when Print All is selected Oldest First Note Alphabetical is the factory default setting Newest First Understanding the printer menus Finishing menu Use Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Blank Pages Do Not Print Print Collate 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Separator Sheets Off Between
183. gs to allow the printer at least a write access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system e The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Do either of the following e Click Set up Scan to Network gt Click here e Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Scan to Network 3 Specify the destinations and then customize the settings Notes e See the mouse over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting e To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 e Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From y
184. gt Options gt Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server then the Delayed Send button does not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the fax queue 4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted and then touch ZS 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Faxing 107 Creating shortcuts Notes e Make sure that Fax Shortcuts is set to Display From the home screen touch gt Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization gt Fax Shortcuts gt Display gt Submit e To delete a fax shortcut touch gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcuts gt the shortcut to delete gt Delete now Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password then contact your system support person 3 Type a name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number Notes e To create a multiple numbe
185. guration using the Embedded Web Server 26 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 274 indicator light 15 individual settings information erasing 203 initial fax setup 90 using the Embedded Web Server 90 Insert hole punch box 275 Insert Tray x 275 356 inserting a header or footer copying 81 installing a memory card 30 installing an optional card 31 installing hardware options order of installation 38 installing printer 45 installing the optional trays 38 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 275 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 275 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 275 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 275 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 275 Insufficient soace between paper stacks in Tray 3 275 internal options 27 internal print server troubleshooting 290 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 49 troubleshooting 290 Internal Solutions Port ISP installing 32 IP address of computer finding 20 IP address printer finding 20 IPv6 menu 132 J jams avoiding 242 locating jam areas 243 locations 243 numbers 243 jams clearing in 3000 sheet tray 252 in door C 252 in door F 252 in multipurpose feeder 245 in top ADF door 269 Job Accounting menu 189 Index L labels paper tips 59 letterhead copying on 77 loading multipurpose feeder 59 loading trays 59 line filter 95 LINE port 44
186. h of the envelopes Before loading the envelopes on the tray flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels e From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels loaded in the tray e Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities e For more information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com e Use labels designed specifically for laser printers e Do not use labels with slick backing material e Do not use labels with exposed adhesive e Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties e Before loading labels on the tray flex and fan labels to loosen them Straighten the edges on a level surface Tips on using letterhead e Use letterhead specifically for laser printers e Print samples before buying large quantities e Before loading letterhead flex and fan the sheets e When printing on letterhead take note of the page orientation Source
187. h the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press Ea on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Understanding the copy options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document Touch the paper size that matches the original document e To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width touch Mixed Sizes e To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document touch Auto Size Sense Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded e f the paper size setting for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference Copying 82 Scale This option lets you scale the document from 25 to 400 of the original document size You can also set automatic Scaling e When copying to a different paper size such as from legal size to letter size paper set the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying e To decrease or increase the value by 1 touch or onthe printer control panel To make a continuous decrease or increase in value hold the button for two seconds or more
188. he USB input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol Set the network address information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print serve
189. he contrast of printed objects 0 5 Note 0 is the factory default setting Job Accounting menu Note This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed T Job Accounting Log Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Note Off is the factory default setting On Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Determine and set how often a log file is created Daily Note Monthly is the factory default setting Weekly Monthly Log Action at End of Frequency Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires None Note None is the factory default setting E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Log Near Full Level Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log Action Off at Near Full 1 99 Note 5 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 190 Log Action at Near Full Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full None Notes E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log e None is the factory default setting E mail amp Delete Oldest Log e The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is Post Current Log triggered Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log De
190. he display Step 4 Go to step 5 Securely connect the Check the printer connections cables If applicable check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure e Telephone e Handset e Answering machine Are the cable connections secure Step 5 The problem is solved Go to step 6 a Check the telephone wall jack Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack Listen for a dial tone If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack 5 Ifyou hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Troubleshooting 324 Action Yes No Step 6 Go to step 7 Connect the printer to Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct an analog phone digital connector service or the correct The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected digital connector to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e If you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider If you are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more inf
191. he factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Use Multi Page Tiff Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x E mail Bit Depth 1 bit 8 bit Custom Job scanning Scan Preview Allow Save as Shortcut 173 Specify how the images are sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Choose between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting e This menu setting applies to all scan functions Specify whether to print the transmission log Note Print log is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specify the bin for FTP logs Notes e Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x appears only when at least one optional bin is installed Enable the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item app
192. he placement of the document or photo photo facedown on the Make sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on the E ee in the scanner glass in the upper left corner ep Perce CONME Is the document or photo loaded correctly Step 5 Go to step 6 See Print quality Send a print job and then check for print quality problems problems on page 301 From the Copy menu adjust the toner darkness e When the print becomes faded replace the toner cartridge Is the print quality satisfactory Step 6 Go to step 7 Change the Content Check the scan settings Type and Content From the Scan screen make sure that the Content Type and Content Saree ari 9 Source settings are correct for the document being scanned ae Seen an being scanned Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned Step 7 Problem solved Contact customer Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher quality output support Did the increased resolution produce a higher quality output Scan job was not successful Action Yes No Go to step 2 Connect the cables Check the cable connections properly Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Are the cables securely connected Step 2 Change the file name Go to step 3 Check if the file name is already in use Is the file name already in use Troubleshooting 331 Action Step 3 Close the file yo
193. he printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for Download Understanding the printer menus Use Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm 193 Specify the symbol set for each font name Notes e 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes e 12 is the factory default setting e Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 0 014 inch e Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For nonscalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but it cannot be changed Specify the or
194. he printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Action Yes Go to step 2 Open the held jobs folder on the printer display and then verify that your print job is listed Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder Step 2 The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data e Delete the print job and then send it again e For PDF files generate a new PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one For Windows users a Open the Print Properties folder b From the Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box c Enter a PIN number For Macintosh users Save each print job name each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer Does the job print Step 3 Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs Does the job print The problem is solved The problem is solved T Select one of the Print and Hold options and then resend the print job For more information see Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 73 Go to step 3 Add additional printer memory Troubleshooting 295 Envelope seals when printing a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment Contact customer The problem is solved Note Printing on envelopes with high mo
195. he tray Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type b Insert the tray properly If jam recovery is enabled then the print jobs will reprint automatically Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved a Review the tips on avoiding jams For more information see Avoiding SUpport jams on page 242 b Follow the recommendations and then resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared Action Check the entire paper path for jammed paper Contact customer The problem is solved a Remove any jammed paper support b From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Does the paper jam message remain Troubleshooting Solving print problems Printing problems Confidential and other held jobs do not print 294 Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if t
196. hen click Apply For multiple applications a Click Settings gt Import Export b Export or import a configuration file Note When importing a configuration file click Submit to complete the process Additional printer setup 27 Additional printer setup Installing internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Available internal options e Memory card DDR2 DIMM Flash memory e Fonts e Firmware cards Forms and Bar Code PRESCRIBE IPDS e Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP Standard 10 100 1000 Ethernet MarkNet N8350 802 11 b g n wireless print server MarkNet N8352 802 11 b g n wireless print server Accessing the controller board Note Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well
197. hts IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service Notices 352 The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 IKEv1 implemented in the product or service Index Index Numerics 300K maintenance kit ordering 212 Symbols x maintenance kit very low 80 xy 278 x page jam clear manual feeder 200 xx 245 x page jam detach the 3000 sheet tray and open door F 24y xx 252 x page jam open door C and clear all jammed media 2yy xx 245 x page jam open door D and clear all jammed media 24y xx 249 x page jam open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise Leave paper in bin 426 xx 428 xx 264 x page jam open doors G H and J and clear jammed paper Leave paper in bin 400 402 255 x page jam press latch at area E to open ADF s top cover 28y xx printer messages 269 x page jam press latch to access area G and clear jammed staples Leave paper in bin 402 93 261 x page jam press latch to access area G Leave paper in bin 40y xx 258 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door C 2yy xx 247 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door D 24y xx 251 A accessing the controller b
198. ick the Copy Printer Settings 3 Tochange the language select a language from the drop down menu and then click Click here to submit language 4 Click Printer Settings 5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields Note If you want to add or remove a target printer then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP 6 Click Copy Printer Settings Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low near end of life or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Note The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu select one of the following notification options The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs SNMP Only The printer generates a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP alert when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page E mail The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e mail about the status of the supply The printer does not
199. id the gray background disappear from the prints Horizontal voids appear on prints Leading edge LRA Trailing edge Troubleshooting 304 Action Step 1 CE to step 2 The is solved a Make sure that your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Do horizontal voids appear on prints Incorrect margins on prints Troubleshooting 305 Action Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more
200. ientation of text and graphics on the page Notes e Portrait is the factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page e Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page Specify the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting e The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page Set the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting e The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty 10 pitch characters Understanding the printer menus Use PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Env Off None 0 199 Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T1 Default 4 T1 Default 5 T1 Default 20 T1 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Yes No 194 Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory
201. il needed 1 Pull out the tray Note Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display Doing so may cause a jam Loading paper and specialty media 52 2 Squeeze and slide the paper guides to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Loading paper and specialty media 53 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side faceup gt RN i Ld r a gt f Notes e Load printable side facedown for duplex printing e Load pre punched paper with the holes toward the front or the left side of the tray e Load letterhead with the header on the left side of the tray e Make sure that the paper is below the maximum fill line on the edge of the paper tray Overfilling may cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray 6 From the control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Open the multipurpose feeder Loading paper and specialty media 54 2 Adjust the guide to match the size of the paper you are loading 3 Flexthe sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper e Load only one size and type of paper Loading let
202. il shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings 3 From the Other Settings column click Manage Shortcuts gt E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Typeaunique name for the e mail recipient and then type the e mail address If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Click Add Creating an e mail shortcut using the control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to MyShortcut gt Create gt E mail 2 Type a unique shortcut name and then touch Done 3 Configure the e mail settings and then touch Done 4 Touch E mail Shortcuts on the home screen to verify the shortcut E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the control panel 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen touch E mail and then enter the information needed 3 Configure and then save the output file type settings 4 Touch Send It E mailing 86 Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad 3 Touch Send It
203. ily buffer user data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances e The printer is being decommissioned e The printer hard disk is being replaced e The printer is being moved to a different department or location e The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization e The printer is being removed from your premises for service e The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Securing the printer 203 In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises e Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break c
204. impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper e Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated e Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 80 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper
205. ing Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory No cancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected This menu item appears only when a non defective flash memory card is installed Delete downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Notes e Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes e When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed e To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn off or reset the printer Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting Print a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting Scale page content to fit the selected paper size Note No is the factory default setting Understanding the p
206. ing from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job e Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer x indicates the value of the printer region y indicates the value of the cartridge region x and y can have the following values Printer and toner cartridge regions Region number Region United States Canada European Economic Area EEA Switzerland Asia Pacific Australia New Zealand a tatin americas Troubleshooting 282 Region number Region Africa Middle East rest of Europe Notes e The x and y values represent xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel e The x and y values must match for printing to continue Replace jammed originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to clear the mess
207. ings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 61 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports two sided printing then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper Notes e Two sided printing is the default setting in the print driver e For a complete list of supported products and countries go to http support lexmark com Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by setting multiple page printing N Up for the print job Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document e Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it e Print o
208. inter and any options you have purchased in the following order e Optional 2 x 500 or 2500 sheet tray e Printer e Staple finisher Note This option is supported only in select printer models Staple hole punch finisher or booklet finisher Optional 3000 sheet tray Note The staple finisher is not supported if another finisher is installed For more information on installing the finishers and optional trays see the instruction sheet that came with the option Installing optional trays Notes e For information on installing the optional 3000 sheet tray see the instruction sheet that came with the option e Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer Additional printer setup 39 A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purcha
209. ion see Adding available options in the rint driver on page 45 Attaching cables CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable Make sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port Use the To 1 EXT port Connect additional devices telephone or answering machine tothe printer and the telephone line Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region Note Remove the plug to access the port LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack RJ 11 DSL filter or VoIP adapter or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes Additional printer setup 45 Use the Ke Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet Internal Solutions Port ISP or Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk printer hard disk slot Note If the printer has support for wireless connection then the wireless antenna is attached here Ethernet port Connect the
210. ion Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log Faxing 89 e Use the ADF for multiple page or two sided documents Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages e Load the original document faceup small items suchas postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow Setting up the printer to fax A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Notes e The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions e During the initial printer setup clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue e The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Faxing 90 Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission fax name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and fax number teleph
211. is the factory default setting Specify the network mode Notes e Infrastructure is the factory default setting This lets the printer access a network using an access point e Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network Note 802 11b g n is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 134 Use ie Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network AppleTalk menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt AppleTalk e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support Yes Note No is the factory default setting No View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name Note The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address Note The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network list of zones available on the network Note The default zone for the network is the factory default setting Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job re
212. isture content can seal the support flaps b Resend the print job Does the envelope seal when printing Error message about reading the flash drive appears Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Insert the flash drive Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port into the front USB port Note The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB port Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port Step 2 Wait until the printer is Go to step 3 Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green ready then view the held jobs list and then print the documents Note A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy Is the indicator light blinking green Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Check for an error message on the display b Clear the message Does the error message still appear Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved Check if the flash drive is supported For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives see Supported flash drives and file types on page 72 Does the error message still appear Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person support Does the error message still appear Troubleshooting 296 Incorrect characters print Action Co Step 1 Deactivate Hex Trace Go to step 2 Make sure that the printer is not in Hex Trac
213. it Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems b Resend the print job Is the printer printing solid black pages Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Is the printer printing solid black pages Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Is the printer printing solid black pages Print irregularities Leading edge Trailing edge Troubleshooting 308 Yes Go to step 2 Do print irregularities still appear Step 2 Go to step 3 Specify the paper size From the control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to and type in the tray match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the Do the printer settings match the size and type of the paper loaded in the may tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight in Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 4 From the control panel Go to step 5 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Step 5 Go to step 6
214. ive setup and active embedded solutions Side Duplex Collate Copy from Letter 8 5 x 11 in Copy to Letter 8 5 x 11 in Plain Paper Content Scale Auto me 100 d Text Photo Save As Shortcut Darkness r il i Advanced Options Touch Copy It Print a copy Understanding the printer control panel 19 Other touch screen buttons E Cancel e Cancel an action or a selection e Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes Reset values on the screen Setting up and using the home screen applications 20 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes e Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications e There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase For more information go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer e The shortcuts that you created using MyShortcut can only be edited or deleted using the application For more information see Using MyShortcut on page 23 Finding the IP address of the printer Note Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server You can find the printer IP address e From the top left corner of the printer home screen e From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then fin
215. ks into place 8 Slide the finisher back into place Clearing jams 264 x page jam open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise Leave paper in bin 426 xx 428 xx If the jammed paper is located under door G then open the door and remove the paper 1 Open door J and then lift handle J1 2 Open door H Eats Barn Gala aS Clearing jams 265 3 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed e Door J e Areas H1 and H2 Clearing jams e Areas H3 and H4 e Area H6 4 Using handle H5 pull out the booklet maker 5 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 266 267 Clearing jams e Area H8 pem a PEREAT e Area H9 Clearing jams 268 e Area H10 6 Push the booklet maker back into place 7 Close door H 8 Open door C and then remove the jammed paper A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it Notes e Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer e Make sure that all paper fragments are removed e If the 3000 sheet tray is installed then slide the tray to the right to open the door 9 Close door C Clearing jams 269 x page jam press latch at area E to open ADF s to
216. l panel to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Continue and replace later Jams may continue to occur to ignore the message and continue printing Replace photoconductor 0 pages remain 84 xy Replace the photoconductor unit to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see Replacing a photoconductor unit on page 213 Note If you do not have a replacement photoconductor unit then see Ordering supplies on page 211 or go to www lexmark com Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy Remove the toner cartridge and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace unsupported photoconductor 32 xy Remove the photoconductor unit and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see Replacing a photoconductor unit on page 213 Note If you do not have a replacement photoconductor unit then see Ordering supplies on page 211 or go to www lexmark com Replace waste toner bottle 82 xy Replace the waste toner bottl
217. le finisher is installed Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Specify whether holes are created on printed outputs for the purpose of collecting the sheets in a binder or folder Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Understanding the printer menus Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Offset Pages None Between Copies Between Jobs Quality menu Use Print Resolution 300 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi 1200 Image Q 2400 Image Q Pixel Boost Off Fonts Horizontally Vertically Both directions Toner Darkness 1 10 188 Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose of collecting the sheets in a binder or folder Notes e 3 holes is the U S factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting e This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Offset pages at certain instances Notes e None is the factory default setting Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then each set of printed pages are offset such as all page 1 s and all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless
218. led Understanding the printer menus 183 Hole Punch On Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Duplex Binding Long edge Short edge Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Border None Solid Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specify whether prints have punched holes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints Notes e 3 holes is the U S factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Define binding for two sided pages in relation to the page orientation of the printed document Notes e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Specify that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The number selected is the number of
219. lete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Log Action at Full Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum None limit LOOMB E mail amp Delete Current Log Note None is the factory default setting E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs E mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log file prefix Utilities menu Remove Held Jobs Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Confidential Held Not Restored All Notes e Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected e Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Understanding the printer menus Format Flash Yes No Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Activate Hex Trace Coverage Estimator Print Error Pages Scale to Fit Yes No 191 Format the flash memory Warn
220. ling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Saving money and the environment 201 Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 100 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can
221. lipped Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Action Step 1 a Movethe paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded b Resend the print job The es is solved a Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor unit support Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Troubleshooting 303 Gray background on prints Leading edge Trailing edge a Noo The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the Quality menu on the control panel decrease the toner darkness b Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor unit and the toner cartridge Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems b Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints C Step 4 The problem is solved Contact customer Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support D
222. lope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Manual Envelope Type Specify the envelope type being manually loaded Envelope Note Envelope is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Custom Type x Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Configure MP Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Cassette Notes Manual First e Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source e Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs e First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding the printer menus Substitute Size menu Use Substitute Size Off Statement A5 Letter A4 11 x 17 A3 All Listed Paper Texture menu Use Plain Texture Smooth Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Smooth Normal Rough Transparency Texture Smooth Normal Rough Recycled Texture Smooth Normal Rough Labels Texture Smooth Normal Rough Bond Texture Smooth Normal Rough Envelope Texture Smooth Normal Rough 122 Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes e All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed e Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change Paper appearing Specify the relative t
223. lowing Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded To clear the message and continue printing Automatically select paper To use the paper loaded in the tray Reset active bin To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Load Multipurpose Feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper e From the control panel touch one of the following Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded To clear the message and continue printing Automatically select paper To use the paper loaded in the tray Reset active bin To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Load staples Try one or more of the following Replace or insert the staple cartridge in the finisher For instructions on inserting or replacing a staple cartridge in the finisher touch More information on the printer control panel From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing From the printer control panel touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 278 Load staples G11 G12 Try one or more of the following e Replace or insert the staple cartridge into the finisher For instructions on replacing or inserting the staple cartridge into the finisher touch More information on the cont
224. lt setting Specify the RARP address assignment setting Note Off is the factory default setting Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Enable AutolP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enable the built in FTP server which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer Yes Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enable the built in Web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS View or change the current DDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable mDNS View or change the current mDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No View or change the backup DNS server addresses Enable HTTPS View or change the current HTTPS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No IPv6 menu To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports menu gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt IPv6 e Network Ports menu gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers
225. ly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a service representative A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Learning about the printer 9 Learning about the printer Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available at
226. ly to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable INNO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Patent acknowledgment The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography ECC Cipher Suites for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminator
227. mber States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CE Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West Ne
228. ment using the control panel 85 F factory defaults restoring 241 fax sending at a scheduled time 106 355 fax and e mail functions setting up 326 fax and e mail functions are not set up 326 fax job canceling 109 Fax memory full 274 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 162 fax name setting 104 fax number setting 104 fax options content source 111 content type 111 darkness 110 delayed send 111 page setup 111 resolution 110 scan preview 111 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 274 fax port 44 fax screen advanced options 111 options 111 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 274 fax setup country or region specific 99 digital telephone service 98 DSL connection 95 standard telephone line connection 91 VolP 96 Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator 274 Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator 274 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 322 can receive but not send faxes 325 can send but not receive faxes 326 cannot send or receive a fax 323 received fax has poor print quality 327 faxing blocking junk faxes 108 changing resolution 108 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 105 Index creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 107 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 107 distinctive ring service 104 fax setup 90 forwarding faxes 110 holding faxes 109 making a fax lighter or darker 1
229. menus 120 Use MP Feeder Type Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled e From the Paper menu set Configure to Cassette for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Manual Paper Size Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded A4 Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory A5 default setting A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico JIS B4 A3 11x17 Folio Statement Universal SRA3 12x18 Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled 121 Specify the paper type being manually loaded Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting e From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Manual for Manual Paper Labels Type to appear as a menu Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Manual Envelope Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope Specify the envelope size being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the U S factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting 10 Enve
230. mode Maintaining the printer 235 Replacing the ADF scan pad 1 Open the scanner cover 2 Remove the ADF scan pad 3 Unpack the new ADF scan pad and then remove the packing materials Maintaining the printer 236 4 Lay the ADF scan pad flat on the scanner glass with the white area facedown 6 Push the corners of the ADF scan pad to secure it into place 7 Close the scanner cover Maintaining the printer 237 Moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely Before moving the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn off the printer and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet e Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer e If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays then remove the trays e Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down e Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer e Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Moving the printer to another location
231. mpts When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts all of the jobs for that user are deleted e Setan expiration time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Save the modified settings Printing information pages For more information on printing information pages see Printing a menu settings page on page 50 and Printing a network setup page on page 50 Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing 75 Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press x on the keypad 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Run gt type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click B or click Start and then click Run b Type co
232. multiple scanning jobs into a single job Note This option appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed e Edge Erase This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Transmission Log This prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scanning 112 Scanning Using Scan to Network Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person After the destinations shared network folders have been established on the network the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server For more information see Setting up Scan to Network on page 24 Scanning to an FTP address Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass e Use the ADF for multiple page or two sided documents Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages Load the original document faceup small items suchas postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow Creating shortcuts Notes e Make sure that FTP Shortcuts is set to Display From the h
233. n an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Resolution This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Save As Shortcut This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name Note Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number Darkness This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document Send As This option lets you set the output type for the scan image Select one of the following e PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages This can be sent as a secured or compressed file e TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document e XPS Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages E mailing 88 Page Setup This option lets you change the following settings e Sides Duplex
234. n is the factory default setting PostScript emulation uses a PostScript interpreter for processing print jobs PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Determine if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information or options or both are obtained the stored jobs print Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only if a non read only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding the printer menus 185 Use Print Area Set the logical and physical printable area Normal Notes Whole Page e Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Download Tar
235. n turn on the printer If the printer does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment Does other electrical equipment work Make sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer Step 5 Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports Go to step 6 Are the cables inserted in the correct ports e The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port Step 6 Turn on the switch or Go to step 7 Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker reset the breaker Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker Troubleshooting Action Yes Step 7 Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible Power cord directly to power supplies or extension cords Connect the printer a properly grounded electrical outlet Go to step 10 Go to step 11 Go to step 12 The problem is solved Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords Step 8 Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer print server option or other network device Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Step 9 Make sure to install all hardware options properly
236. nd replace the defective printer hard disk Remove packaging material area name Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location Remove packaging material open door C remove metal clips remove all screws from scanner carriage Open door C and the scanner cover and then remove any remaining packaging material Note Make sure door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer Remove paper from all bins Remove the paper from all of the bins The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Troubleshooting 281 Remove paper from bin x Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from linked set bin name Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the paper stack from the standard bin Replace all originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job e Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job e Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scann
237. ne copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Saving money and the environment 199 Avoid paper jams Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 242 Saving energy Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode Notes e Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode e Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode e If the printer is in Hibernate mode then the Embedded Web Server is disabled 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button menu select Hibernate and then touch Submit Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting lee ie Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Off supports the performance specifications
238. ned image Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specify the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 179 Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Use Format Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP 1217 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting A la Content Type Specify the content of the original docume
239. ng If selected then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam e If Page level is selected then rescan from the jammed page forward Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 is the factory default setting Specify a contact name for the printer Note The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server Specify the location of the printer Note The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention For each alarm type select from the following options Off Single Continuous Notes e Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps e Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm e Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Understanding the printer menus Use Timeouts Standby Mode Disabled 1 240 Timeouts Sleep Mode Disabled 1 120 Timeouts Print with Display off Allow printing with display off Display on when printing Timeouts Hibernate Timeout Disabled 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 6 hours 1 day 2 days 3 days 1 week 2 weeks 1 month Timeouts Hibernate Timeout on Connection Do Not Hibernate Hibernate Timeouts Screen Timeout 15 300 Timeouts Prolong Screen Timeout 154 Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer enters a lower power state Note 15 is the factor
240. ng of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID specified Note Off is the factory default setting Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Staple Off 1 staple 2 staples 4 staples Enable Color Fax Receive Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Auto Print Logs Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Logs Display Remote Station Name Dialed Number Enable Job Log 169 Specify whether prints are punched Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a staple hole punch finisher is installed Specify whether prints are stapled Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale Note On is the factory default setting Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job Note Print log is the factory default setting Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error Note Print Never is the factory default setting Enable automatic printing of
241. ngs 175 General Settings 148 Help 196 HTML 195 Image 196 IPv6 132 Job Accounting 189 Miscellaneous Security Settings 142 Network x 129 Network Card 131 Network Reports 130 Paper Loading 123 Paper Size Type 118 Paper Texture 122 Parallel x 136 PCL Emul 192 PDF 191 PostScript 192 Quality 188 Reports 128 Security Audit Log 145 Serial x 138 Set Date and Time 146 Setup 184 SMTP Setup 140 Standard Network 129 357 Standard USB 134 Substitute Size 122 TCP IP 131 Universal Setup 126 Utilities 190 Wireless 133 XPS 191 menus diagram 117 message e mail options 87 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu 142 mobile device printing from 72 moving the printer 10 237 Multi Send adding a profile 24 setting up 24 multipurpose feeder loading 53 MyShortcut about 23 N Network x menu 129 Network x software error 54 278 Network Card menu 131 Network Reports menu 130 network setup page printing 50 No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled 278 noise emission levels 337 non volatile memory 202 erasing 203 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 279 notices 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 number of remaining pages estimate 210 O Open door H and remove paper from beneath area H10 279 optional 2 x 500 sheet tray installing 38 optional 2500 sheet tray installing 38 Index optional card installing 31 optional trays installing 38 options
242. ngth of the connector on the card must touch and be flush with the controller board Installing an Internal Solutions Port The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Install an ISP for additional connectivity options Note Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors Additional printer setup 33 1 Unpack the ISP kit pa se o oo 2 Plastic mounting bracket Thumbscrews 2 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 27 3 Remove the printer hard disk Note The hard disk must be removed before installing an ISP a Unplug the hard disk interface cable from the controller board Additional printer setup 34 b Remove the screws that secure the hard disk c Remove the hard disk 4 Install th
243. nnected View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter Network Address View the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled 0 10 225 seconds Notes e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e A setting value of O disables the timeout e fa value between 1 and 9 is selected then Invalid appears on the display and the value is not saved Banner Page Allow the printer to print a banner page Note Off is the factory default setting On TCP IP menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt TCP IP e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers Use Set Hostname Set the current TCP IP host name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address View or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask View or change the current TCP IP netmask Understanding the printer menus 132 Use To View or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment Note On is the factory defau
244. ns when the printer is answering calls Note All Rings is the factory default setting Specify e mail server information Understanding the printer menus 171 Use To Format Specify the format of the scanned file PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Set the version of the PDF file that is scanned for e mailing 1 2 1 7 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting A la Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Black White Laser Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and white Note On is the factory default setting Resolution Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch 75 dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Understanding the printer menus 172 Use ie Original Size Specify the size of the document being scanned Letter Note Letter
245. nt Text Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Black White Laser Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black and white Note On is the factory default setting Resolution Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi 75 dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi Darkness Lighten or darken the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Understanding the printer menus 180 Use To Original Size Specify the size of the original document Letter Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive Folio Statement Oficio Mexico Universal Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Custom Scan Size x Book Original Business Card 3x5in 4x6in Sides Duplex Specify the page orientation of text and graphics Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for
246. nter Maintaining the printer 228 2 Remove all trays e Standard tray e Optional 2 x 500 or 2500 sheet tray Note To remove the optional 2 x 500 sheet tray follow the procedure in removing the standard tray 3 Open door C Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer Note If the 3000 sheet tray is installed slide the tray to open the door Maintaining the printer 229 a 4 Open door D Notes e You can only open door D if the optional 2 x 500 or 2500 sheet tray is installed e If the 3000 sheet tray is installed slide the tray to open the door 5 Locate the rollers Maintaining the printer 230 6 Remove the rollers 7 Insert the new rollers until they click into place Note Make sure to insert the rollers to their right places 8 Close doors C and D 9 Insert the trays Replacing the transfer module Note Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer Maintaining the printer 231 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open door C Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it Note If the 3000 sheet tray is installed then slide the tray to the right to open the door 3 Remove the door stopper Maintaining the printer 232 4 Loosen the screw
247. nter back on Troubleshooting 279 e Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 Try one or more of the following e From the control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the flash memory Install a flash memory card with larger capacity Note Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted Open door H and remove paper from beneath area H10 Remove the paper from the specified area Paper changes needed Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Parallel port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Enable the parallel port From the printer control panel navigate to Network Ports gt Parallel x gt Parallel Buffer gt Auto Note The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Photoconductor low 84 xy You may need to order a replacement photoconductor If necessary select Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing Photoconductor very
248. ntrol printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 Click Delete For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu open the printers folder 2 Open the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it Copying 76 Copying e Use the ADF for multiple page or two sided documents Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages e Load the original document faceup small items suchas postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow Making copies Copying using the ADF or scanner glass 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass Note To avoid a cropped image make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt specify the copy settings gt Copy It Note To make a quick copy from the control panel press gt Copying photos 1 Place a photo on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt ZS 3 From the Content Source menu select the setting that best matches the original photo 4 Touch ZS gt Copy It Copying 77 Copying on transparencies or letterhead 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From
249. nty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Fuser Units Transfer Transport Units Paper Feed items if any and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a Life Warning or Scheduled Maintenance message for such item Notices 350 To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions li
250. nu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus 139 Use Serial Buffer Set the size of the serial input buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu sele
251. o connect another device telephone or answering machine to the same wall jack and if the device has a non RJ 11 connector then connect it directly to the telephone adapter Notes e The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter Do not remove the plug from the f port of the printer e In some countries or regions the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug Faxing 102 Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany The German wall jack has two kinds of ports The N ports are for fax machines modems and answering machines The F port is for telephones N F N Faxing 103 Connect the printer to any of the N ports 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ 11 adapter and then connect the adapter to an N port 3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack then connect the devices as shown Note Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system Faxing 104 Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company This service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern
252. o streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Troubleshooting 315 Action Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Streaked vertical lines appear on prints Leading edge Trailing edge Yes No Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 From the control panel set the paper texture type and weight in the following Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray e Specify the paper texture type and Do the paper texture type and weight match the paper in the tray weight from the tray settings to match the paper Do one or more of the loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture type and weight specified in the tray settings Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Troubleshooting Action Step 4 a Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor unit 1 Remove the photoconductor uni
253. oard 27 accessing the Embedded Web Server 20 Active NIC menu 129 adapter plug 99 adding hardware options print driver 45 ADF scan pad replacing 235 adjusting copy quality 79 adjusting printer display brightness 200 adjusting Sleep mode 200 adjusting toner darkness 71 advanced options touch screen copy 83 e mail 88 fax 111 FTP 116 answering machine setting up 91 AppleTalk menu 134 applications home screen 22 understanding 21 attaching cables 44 automatic document feeder ADF using 14 available internal options 27 avoiding jams 63 avoiding paper jams 242 B Bin Setup menu 126 blocking junk faxes 108 buttons control panel 15 buttons touch screen using 18 C cables Ethernet 44 USB 44 canceling a fax job 109 canceling a print job from a computer 75 from the printer control panel 75 canceling an e mail 86 cannot open Embedded Web Server 333 Card Copy setting up 23 card stock tips 58 Cartridge low 88 xy 271 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 271 Cartridge very low 88 xy 271 353 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 271 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 271 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 271 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 272 changing output file type e mailing 86 charger cleaning 206 checking an unresponsive printer 287 checking status of parts and supplies 210 checking the
254. ob Is the print still too light Step 7 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems Is the print still too light Repeating defects appear on prints Troubleshooting Action Yes Step 1 a Clean the charger and the printhead lens Go to step 2 b Resend the print job Do repeating defects still appear on prints Step 2 a Replace the photoconductor unit if the distance between the defects is equal to 95 8 mm 3 77 in b Resend the print job Go to step 3 Do repeating defects still appear on prints Step 3 a Replace the 300K maintenance kit if the distance between the defects SUpport ort is equal to either of the following e 62 65 mm 2 47 in e 75 85 mm 2 99 in b Resend the print job Do repeating defects still appear on prints Shadow images appear on prints Trailing edge Yes Go to step 2 Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray Step 2 Go to step 3 From the control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to m
255. oblem is solved Contact customer Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Are the printer and scanner working Troubleshooting Solving home screen application problems An application error has occurred Action Yes Go to step 2 Check the system log for relevant details a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer home screen e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 b Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt System tab gt Log c From the Filter menu select an application status d From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit Does an error message appear in the log 333 a Contact customer support Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer Resolve the error Is the application working now Embedded Web Server does not open Yes Go to step 2 Make sure the printer IP address is correct View the printer IP address e From the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section
256. of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Notices 351 Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not app
257. of the device To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Notices 347 Industrie Canada Canada Selon la r glementation d Industrie Canada l metteur radio ne fonctionner qu avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal ou inf rieur ont t approuv s par Industrie Canada Pour r duire les interf rences radio potentielles aupres d autres utilisateurs le type d antenne et son gain doivent tre choisis de telle sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonn e quivalente PIRE ne soit pas sup rieure a ce qui est n cessaire pour assurer la r ussite de la communication Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d Industrie Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas causer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toutes les interf rences y compris les interf rences pouvant entrainer un fonctionnement ind sirable Pour viter toute interf rence radio au service sous licence cet appareil est destin a tre utilis a l int rieur et a l cart des fen tres afin d assurer une protection maximale Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Me
258. of the number of copies printed This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch Note 600 dpi is the factory default setting Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity in order to enhance images horizontally or vertically or to enhance fonts Note Off is the factory default setting Lighten or darken the printed output Notes e 8 is the factory default setting e Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner Understanding the printer menus 189 Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes e Off is the factory default setting e You can set this option from the printer software For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and context menus e To set this option using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field Gray Correction Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off Brightness Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it You can conserve toner 6 to6 by lightening the output Note 0 is the factory default setting Contrast Adjust t
259. of the printer Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle e Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed e The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper e Enable the automatic two sided duplex feature e Turn off print log features 3 Click Submit Saving money and the environment 200 Adjusting Sleep mode 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode 3 Apply the changes Adjusting the brightness of the printer display To save energy or if you have trouble reading the display adjust its brightness settings Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings 3 Inthe Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Recyc
260. off Leading edge Trailing edge Yes No Go to step 2 Specify the paper type From the Paper menu on the printer control panel check the paper type texture and weight texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper Do the paper type texture and weight match the paper loaded in the loaded in the tray tray Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Resend the print job support Does the toner still rub off Toner specks appear on prints Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Do toner specks appear on prints Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Do toner specks appear on prints Troubleshooting Transparency print quality is poor Action Yes Step 1 Go to step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency Step 2 Contact customer a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency support b Resend the print job Is the print quality still poor Uneven print density N ABCD ABCD Yes Go to step 2 a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Is the print density uneven Step 2 Contact customer Replace the photoconductor unit an
261. ollowing locations Clearing jams 254 Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it e Fuser area Below the fuser area e Duplex area 255 Clearing jams e Above the duplex area 7 Close door C and then slide the 3000 sheet tray back into place x page jam open doors G H and J and clear jammed paper Leave paper in bin 4yy xx 1 Open door G and then remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 256 3 Open door H ET T coz mia g 4 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed e Door J Clearing jams 257 e Areas H1 and H2 e Areas H3 and H4 e Area H6 5 Close Door H 6 Open door C and then remove the jammed paper Note Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer Clearing jams 258 Notes e Make sure that all paper fragments are removed e If the 3000 sheet tray is installed then slide the tray to the right to open the door 7 Close door C x page jam press latch to access area G Leave paper in bin 40y xx 1 Remove all paper from the staple finisher bin Clearing jams 259 2 Press the latch and slide the staple fini
262. om the Finishing menu on the printer control panel set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Step 2 The problem is solved a From the printer software set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note Setting Collate to 1 1 1 2 2 2 in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Step 3 The problem is solved Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Did the job print and collate correctly Multiple language PDF files do not print The problem is solved a Check ifthe print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts For more information see the documentation that came with Adobe Acrobat b Generate a new PDF file and then resend the print job Do the files print Step 2 The problem is solved a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat b Click File gt Print gt Advanced gt Print As Image gt OK gt OK Do the files print 297 Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Contact customer support Go to step 2 Contact customer Troubleshooting 298 Print job takes longer than expected Action No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Disable Eco Mode From the control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings
263. omatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 to 120 minutes 10 minutes is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 143 Security Reset Jumper Adjust the security settings No Effect Access controls No Security Notes Reset factory security defaults e No Effect means the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration e Access controls No Security retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting e Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous Security menu LDAP Certificate Verification Allow the user to request a server certificate Demand Notes Try e Demand is the factory default setting This means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided then the session is terminated immediately Allow Never Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then the session is terminated immediately Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided then the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally e Never means no server ce
264. ome screen touch gt Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization gt FTP Shortcuts gt Display gt Submit e To delete an FTP shortcut touch gt Manage Shortcuts gt FTP Shortcuts gt the shortcut to delete gt Delete now Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Scanning 113 Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Navigate to Settings gt Other Settings area gt Manage Shortcuts gt FTP Shortcut Setup 3 Enter the appropriate information Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password then contact your system support person 4 Enter a shortcut number Note If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt JT gt type a name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK Notes e If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information e f you enter a numbe
265. omponent parts and render them unreadable e Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 From the control panel hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears 3 From the Configuration menu navigate to Restore Factory Defaults gt Erase Printer Memory gt Yes The printer restarts several times during this process 4 Touch Back and then exit the Configuration menu Note The printer performs a power on reset and then returns to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory 1 Turn off the printer 2 From the control panel hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears 3 From the Configuration menu navigate to Restore Factory Defaults gt Erase Hard Disk gt select the method to erase the hard disk memory gt Yes Note This pro
266. one number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual For more information see Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment on page 342 To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear 1 When the Fax Name screen appears do the following a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes b Enter the fax name and then touch Submit 2 When the Fax Number screen appears enter the fax number and then touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Fax Name field type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 Inthe Fax Number fiel
267. ontains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on E mailing 84 E mailing Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass e Use the ADF for multiple page or two sided documents Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages e Load the original document faceup small items suchas postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow Setting up the printer to e mail Configuring e mail settings 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settings gt E mail Settings 3 Enter the appropriate information and then click Submit E mailing 85 Creating an e mail shortcut Notes e Make sure that E mail Shortcuts is set to Display From the home screen touch gt Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization gt E mail Shortcuts gt Display gt Submit e To delete an e mail shortcut touch gt Manage Shortcuts gt E mail Shortcuts gt the shortcut to delete gt Delete Entry gt Delete now Creating an e ma
268. or in a printer hard disk are not affected 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now 2 Apply the changes Clearing jams 242 Clearing jams Carefully select paper and specialty media and then load them properly to avoid most jams If jams occur then follow the steps outlined in this chapter Note Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Avoiding jams Load paper properly e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper e Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing e Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it before printing or wait for a prompt to load it e Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator e Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration e Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper Use recommended paper e Use only recommended paper or specialty media e Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Clearing jams 243 Flex fan and straighten paper before loading it
269. original document Note Off is the factory default setting Create a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specify whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 175 FTP Settings menu Use Format Specify the format of the file for FTP sending PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending 12 17 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting A la Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Black White Laser Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other
270. ormation contact your DSL provider If you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector Step 7 Go to step 8 e Try calling the fax Check for a dial tone number to make sure that it is Did you hear a dial tone working properly If the telephone line is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax If you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone Step 8 The problem is solved Go to step 9 Temporarily disconnect other equipment such as answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters between the printer and the telephone line and then try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Step 9 The problem is solved Go to step 10 a Temporarily disable call waiting Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting b Try sending or receiving a fax Can you send or receive a fax Troubleshooting 325 Action Step 10 The problem is solved Go to step 11 a Temporarily disable voice mail service For more information contact your telephone company Note If you want to use both voice m
271. ounts NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Active Directory LDAP Password and PIN Add or edit a security template Control access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access points Miscellaneous Security Settings menu Use Login Restrictions Login failures Failure time frame Lockout time Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout SS EEE Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out Notes e Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts 3 attempts is the factory default setting Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home screen before automatically logging off the user Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before aut
272. our computer you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Remote Operator Panel Settings 3 Select the Enable check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Submit To use the application click Remote Operator Panel gt Launch VNC Applet Setting up and using the home screen applications 26 Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Export or import a configuration file for one or multiple applications For one application a Navigate to Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt select an application gt Configure b Export or import the configuration file Notes e ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved e f a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and t
273. p cover 28y xx 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray 2 Open the top ADF top cover 3 Remove jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the cover 5 Open the scanner cover and then open the bottom ADF door 6 Remove jammed paper Note Make sure that all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 270 7 Close the door 8 Close the scanner cover Troubleshooting 271 Troubleshooting Understanding the printer messages Cartridge low 88 xy You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Cartridge nearly low 88 xy If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Cartridge very low 88 xy You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon For more information see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 221 If necessary touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the control panel and then touch Finished changing paper e Touch Use current paper source to use the available paper size and type in the tray Touch Reset active bin to
274. page images that are printed per side Print a border on each page image Note None is the factory default setting Specify the positioning of multiple page images Notes e Horizontal is the factory default setting e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Understanding the printer menus 184 Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Between Copies Notes Between Jobs e Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Pages Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Multipurpose Feeder Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Print Settings Setup menu Printer Language Set the default printer language PCL Emulation Notes PS Emulation PCL Emulatio
275. periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Touch Submit Paper and specialty media guide 58 Paper and specialty media guide Notes e Make sure that the paper size type and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel e Flex fan and straighten specialty media before loading them e The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser e For more information on card stock and labels see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Using specialty media Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly affect print quality From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the card stock loaded
276. place it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Waste toner bottle nearly full 82 xy You may need to order a waste toner bottle If necessary touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing Weblink server not set up Contact system administrator From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message appears again then contact your system support person Troubleshooting 287 Solving printer problems Basic printer problems The printer is not responding Action Step 1 Make sure the printer is turned on Go to step 2 Turn on the printer Is the printer turned on M 7 Step 2 Press the Sleep button Go to step 3 Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode to wake the printer from Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Step 3 Go to step 4 Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 4 Unplug the other Go to step 5 Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet electrical equipment and the
277. pletely off and the Sleep button turns amber and is blinking Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer while the printer is idle Notes e Do Nothing is the factory default setting e Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration e if the printer is in Sleep mode then the display appears off and the Sleep button turns amber Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the control panel to wake the printer from Sleep mode Understanding the printer menus 157 Factory Defaults Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings Do Not Restore Notes Restore Now Do Not Restore is the factory default setting This keeps the user defined settings e Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Export Configuration Package Export the printer configuration file to a flash drive Export Copy Settings menu Content Type Specify the content of the original document Text Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Specify how the original document was produced Black White Laser Note Black White Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other
278. pported by the printer or install the font that you want to use For more information contact your system support person c Resend the print job Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges Step 2 Contact customer a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you SUpport want to use on your computer For more information contact your system support person b Resend the print job Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges Clipped pages or images Leading edge Trailing edge 301 T The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting 302 a to step 2 Is the page or image clipped Step 2 Go to step 3 Do one or more of the From the control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to following match the paper loaded in the tray e Specify the paper size from the tray Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Is the page or image c
279. printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Set the size of the parallel input buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus Job Buffering Advanced Status Protocol Standard Fastbytes Honor Init Parallel Mode 2 ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YYY YYY 137 Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffer
280. r 4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer 5 Rotate the cartridge clockwise to lock it into place Maintaining the printer 223 6 Close the top front door 7 Clean the charger and the printhead lens For more information see Cleaning the charger and the printhead lens on page 206 Replacing the waste toner bottle 1 Open the bottom front door Maintaining the printer 224 2 Remove the waste toner bottle es 3 Clean the charger and the printhead lens For more information see steps 3 7 of Cleaning the charger and the printhead lens on page 206 4 Unpack the new waste toner bottle 5 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer until it clicks into place 6 Close the bottom front door Maintaining the printer 225 Replacing the 300K maintenance kit Replacing the exhaust and ozone filters Exhaust filter 2 Ozone filter Replacing the exhaust filter 1 Pull out the exhaust filter 2 Unpack the new exhaust filter Maintaining the printer 226 3 Insert the new filter Replacing the ozone filter 1 Pull out the ozone filter 2 Unpack the new ozone filter 3 Insert the new filter Maintaining the printer 227 Replacing the pick feed and separator rollers Note You can use the rollers stored in the compartment inside the standard trays For more information see Storing the rollers on page 212 1 Turn off the pri
281. r Size Type menu The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Open the trays and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type e Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray e Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly Step 2 The problem is solved a Fromthe printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked Note The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly Unexpected page breaks occur Action Increase the printing timeout The problem is solved a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts b Increase the Print Timeout setting and then touch Submit c Resend the print job Did the file print correctly Contact customer Check the original file for manual page breaks Troubleshooting Print quality problems Characters have jagged or uneven edges Yes Go to step 2 a Printafont sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported by the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts b Use a font that is su
282. r and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter e Make sure your access point wireless router is turned on and is working properly Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network e SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name e Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc Additional printer setup 47 e Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select e Security Method There are four basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network 802 1X RADIUS If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network then you may need the following e Authentication type Inner authentication type e 802 1X user name and password e Certificates
283. r av direktiv 1999 5 EG STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS LEXMARK LED PRINTERS AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product lIs manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts lIs during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warra
284. r current values Notices 341 Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Hibernate Mode This product is designed with an ultra low power operating mode called Hibernate mode When operating in Hibernate Mode all other systems and devices are powered down safely The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods e Using the Hibernate Timeout e Using the Schedule Power modes e Using the Sleep Hibernate button Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption di
285. r or address book e To add recipients touch Next number 3 Touch Fax It Faxing 106 Sending a fax using the computer For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Select the printer and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Fax gt Enable fax and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers 4 If necessary configure other fax settings 5 Apply the changes and then send the fax job Notes e The fax option is available only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver For more information go to http support lexmark com To use the fax option with the PostScript driver configure and enable it in the Configuration tab For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print 2 Select the printer 3 Enter the recipient fax number and then configure other fax settings if necessary 4 Send the fax job Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number
286. r shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group e Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number Note If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen touch Fax and then enter the fax number Note To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number 2 Touch T 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK Note If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Faxing 108 Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass Notes e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF tray Place these items on the scanner glass e The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF tray then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to select the resolution you want Note Select a resolution from Standard fastest speed to
287. r that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the control panel 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Done gt Send It Notes e You can also enter the recipient using the shortcut number or address book To add recipients touch Next Number Scanning 114 Scanning to a computer or flash drive Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass e Use the ADF for multiple page or two sided documents Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages Load the original document faceup small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow Setting up Scan to Computer Notes e This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later e Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer Note If your printer is not in the list then add your printer 2 Open the printer properties and then adjust the settings as necessary 3 From the control panel touch Scan to Computer gt select the appropriate scan setting gt Send It Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass
288. r through the USB port Set the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding the printer menus 136 ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Parallel x menu Note This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the
289. reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then touch Finished changing paper e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the size and type of paper in the Paper menu on the control panel and then touch Finished changing paper e Touch Use current paper source to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or feeder Troubleshooting 272 e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the control panel and then touch Finished changing paper e Touch Use current paper source to use the available paper size and type in the tray Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Close door x
290. rinter menus 192 Annotations Print annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Print a page containing the PostScript error Note Off is the factory default setting Disable the SysStart file Note Off is the factory default setting Font Priority Establish the font search order Resident Flash Disk Notes Resident is the factory default setting This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 PCL Emul menu Font Source Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu Resident Disk Download Flash All Notes e Resident is the factory default setting Resident shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read write write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Font Name Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored Courier 10 Note Courier 10 is the factory default setting Courier 10 shows the font name font ID and the storage location in t
291. rinting from a flash drive OF mobile devit iii casecsivciencedesvesvates oiareiedesid enaint Weaken 71 Printing confidential and other held jODS ccccccsseccssecccsecceneceeucceeuceeeueceeucceeuceeeeceseneeeeneeeeeceeeteeseseees 73 PRUNE INTORMALION Pago rroan eTa E eso aasahenea nian becianamenltntel T E E ERER 74 CAN Gling a PRTI ODi a guna sa a S a TES 75 COD VINE sisaren nns E E A a a aan O Mak Ne CODES aaan Aa ne ee sac nace T a sth ae ate sews 76 Creatine da CODY SMORECUU irceseaticssencashassanedecdanssnneait texaen ties bedansmanmtataiaoelaseueteriaanloddetenesianaleeeemecan nee 71 CUSEOMIZINE CODY SCULINES S asns a E A E 78 Placing a neagen Or footeron Pag eS crest iai R A a i 81 Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed esssesssssssserssrserrrrrerssrrrrsrreresresereresresrrsresresrrsresu 81 Understanding the CODY ODLIONS essri a a a A 81 E E E E E A E A Oo SEtLING Up ene PRINS toe Malos e a E E Oa 84 creatine ah e ma SNORCC UD arene ciate itl ice E epee 85 Efi allie a Cl OC UINGN Urcaistecsaticetctceestearsacatacctvoicstcteseosaaescaeus anrene O 85 CUSTOMIZING e ma SCEUIN GS inann nia e a Si a i 86 CAC SUS an Malkoen E E E E T ETE 86 Understanding the e mail OPtTiONS cciccccssisisescccccsscevccsdesaceaseseceaveatssccceasbasersscacessvedseeeava vende EE N 86 Contents A PANS oerein E a nO SECU UD theprinter to fak edeinii ua e a E e N T E 89 SNARE LCG a A EE mee eRe ee ene nee 105 Creatine SIM
292. rmation a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ H TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack Notices 343 A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQH TXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that tempor
293. rmation on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes types and weights of paper they support Note For an unlisted paper size select the closest arger listed size Paper sizes supported by the printer Paper sizes supported by the trays and multipurpose feeder Paper size Dimensions Standard Standard 2x500 2500 sheet 3000 sheet Multipurpose Two sided 500 sheet 500 sheet sheet feeder printing tray Tray tray Tray tray 210 x 297 mm 2 2 2 ezam v fv iw v wf 105 x 148 mm v 4 1 x 5 8 in 182 x 257 mm ezam Y v fyi e v 1 Supported only in short edge orientation Supported only in long edge orientation 3 Supports paper size without size sensing 4 Supported only if the width is from 139 7 mm 5 5 in to 320 mm 12 6 in and the length is from 148 mm 5 83 in to 458 mm 18 in Note Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296 9 mm 11 69 in and the length is up to 1219 2 mm 48 in Set the paper size to Universal Paper and specialty media guide 64 Paper size Dimensions Standard Standard 2x500 2500 sheet 3000 sheet Multipurpose Two sided 500 sheet 500 sheet sheet printing tray Tray tray Tray tray 1 2 Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 in Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in 184 x 267 mm 7 3 x 10 5 in 257 x 364 mm 10 12 x 14 33 in 320 x 450 mm 12 6 x 17 7 in 297 x 420 mm 11 69 x 16 54 in 305 x 457
294. rodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera E necessario utilizzare il filtro poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States Notices 346 relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory no
295. rol panel From the control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the print job x maintenance kit very low 80 xy You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon For more information go to the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Memory full 38 Try one or more of the following e From the control panel touch Cancel job to clear the message Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Install additional printer memory Memory full cannot print faxes From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes attempt to print after the printer is restarted Memory full cannot send faxes 1 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job 2 Try one or more of the following e Reduce the fax resolution and then resend the fax job e Reduce the number of pages in the fax and then resend the fax job No analog phone line connected to modem fax is disabled Connect the printer to an analog phone line Network x software error 54 Try one or more of the following e From the printer control panel touch Continue to continue printing e Turn off the printer wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the pri
296. rol panel attach a flash drive to the printer e To export the log from the Embedded Web Server download the log to a computer Specify whether audit logs are deleted Specify how audit logs are configured Notes Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog No is the factory default setting Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server No is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server Remote Syslog Port identifies the port over which the printer transmits logged events to a remote server Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to transmit logged events to a remote server Normal UDP is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses when sending events to the remote syslog server 4 is the factory default setting Log full behavior determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely fills its allotted memory Wrap over oldest entries is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Configure Log continued Admin s e mail address 256 character string Digitally sign exports On Severity of events to log 0 7 Remote Syslog non logged events No Yes E mail log cleared alert No Yes E mail log wrapped alert No Yes E mail full alert No Y
297. rpose feeder only if the width is up to 296 9 mm 11 69 in and the length is up to 1219 2 mm 48 in Set the paper size to Universal Paper sizes supported by the ADF and scanner glass Paper size Dimensions Scanner glass a m w Business card e a e 257 x 364 mm 10 12x 14 33 in a 320x450 mm 126x 17 7 in x 1 Supported only in short edge orientation 2 Supports paper size without size sensing Paper and specialty media guide 66 Scanner glass Da 297 x 420 mm 11 69 x 16 54 in 305 x 457 mm 12 x 18 in Paper size 11x17 279 4 x 431 8 mm 11 x 17 in 7 3 4 Envelope 98 x 191 mm 3 9 x 7 5 in Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm 3 9 x 6 3 in to 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 in 1 Supported only in short edge orientation aE 89 x 98 4 mm 3 50 x 3 87 in to A 297 x 431 8 mm 11 69 x 17 00 in v V Supports paper size without size sensing Paper types and weights supported by the printer The printer engine supports 60 256 g m 16 68 lb paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper type Standard Standard 2 x 500 2500 sheet 3000 sheet Multipurpose ADF Scanner 500 sheet 500 sheet sheet tray feeder tray Tray 1 tray Tray 2 m E E E H S T 1 Paper is supported for two sided printing 2 Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on usin
298. rs separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Doone or more of the following Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions a_ Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen Note If you clear a check box beside an icon then the icon does not appear on the home screen c Click Submit e Customize the icon for an application For more information see Finding information about the home screen applications on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application niin the different applications ite Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page For more information see Setting up Card Copy on page 23 lt B Scan a document and then send it to a fax number For more information see Faxing on page Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 22 Scan a document and then send it to multiple destinations For more information see Setting up Multi Send on page 24 MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen For more information see Using MyShortcut on page 23 Scan to E mail Scan a document and then send it to an e mail address For more information see E mailing o page 84 Scan to Computer Scan a
299. rs are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Japanese telecom notice The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified by JATE with Certification Number A11 0160001 Lexmark International Inc LEX M03 002 A11 0160001JP Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n2 de r f rence Lexmark 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz Fur dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zahlzeichenubertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 80D1877 fur jede Leitung installiert werden Uber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo p
300. rtificate is requested Minimum PIN Length Limit the digit length of the personal identification number PIN 1 16 Note 4 is the factory default setting Confidential Print menu Use Le Max Invalid PIN Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Off 2 10 Notes e This menu item appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed e When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs Off 1 hour Notes e if the Confidential Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value 4 hours 24 hours 1 week e if the printer is turned off then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are deleted Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 144 Repeat Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Verify Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Reserve Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Note Off is the fac
301. s gt Wireless Connection Setup gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start PIN Method 2 Copy the eight digit WPS PIN 3 Open a Web browser and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field Notes e The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 4 Access the WPS settings For more information see the documentation that came with your access point 5 Enter the eight digit PIN and then save the setting Additional printer setup 49 Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server Before you begin make sure that e Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network e A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Network Ports gt Wireless 3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point wireless router Note Make sure to enter the correc
302. s are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them e Confidential print jobs require a four digit PIN For Windows users 1 With a document open select File gt Print 2 Open the printer properties and then select Print and Hold Printing 74 3 Select the print job type and then assign a user name 4 Send the print job to the printer 5 From the printer home screen open the Held Jobs folder and then release the job For Macintosh users 1 With a document open select File gt Print 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu select Job Routing 3 Select the print job type and then assign a user name 4 Send the print job to the printer 5 From the printer home screen open the Held Jobs folder and then release the job Modifying confidential print settings Note This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings tab gt Security gt Confidential Print Setup 3 Modify the settings e Set a maximum number of PIN entry atte
303. s in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The printer IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Multi Send 3 From the Profiles section click Add and then customize the settings Notes e See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting e If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination then make sure the location settings of the destination are correct Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 20 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Multi Send on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up Scan to Network Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Setting up and using the home screen applications 25 Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations Notes e The printer must have permission to write to the destinations From the computer where the destination is specified use sharing security and firewall settin
304. s of the transfer module lock 5 Remove the paper guide 7 Unpack the new transfer module Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the transfer belt to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Maintaining the printer 233 Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the transfer belt Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 8 Insert the new transfer module until it clicks into place 9 Place the paper guide back into place 10 Tighten the screws of the transfer module lock 11 Reinstall the door stopper 12 Close door C Replacing the transfer roller 1 Open door C Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer Note If the 3000 sheet tray is installed then slide the tray to the right to open the door Maintaining the printer 234 2 Pull out the transfer roller 3 Unpack the new transfer roller 4 Insert the new transfer roller until it clicks into place 5 Close door C Resetting the maintenance counter 1 Turn off the printer 2 From the control panel hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears 3 From the Configuration menu navigate to Reset Maintenance Counter gt Reset 300K Maintenance Kit 4 Touch Back and then exit the Configuration menu Note The printer performs a power on reset and then returns to normal operating
305. s print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes On is the factory default setting e Off disables parallel port negotiation Specify the parallel port protocol Notes e Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting e Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol e On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Set the network address information for an external print server Note This menu item is availa
306. s reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le Notices 349 Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg
307. sconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 Notices 342 Japanese VCCI notice TIC COPNILARARENTSBA ROBES RMELTWNKT CORBIL JIA A TRRMNRECT COREBtRKHR CEAT CBRASS SSH OTFCEMHVET COWMSBIMSRREMBWISGHR aid OKIBRENDCEMBVET VCC I A TOREJ TIAA HIRE CT CORB RR CHEAT BCBS tE LTZ EEIE T COMBINE EY HWS WETS LIBRKANSZCEPHWN ETF VCCI A European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on the
308. se The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Licensing notices All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD NOTICES directory of the installation software CD Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product Printing One sided 52 MX910de 53 MX911de MX911dte 55 MX912de MX912dxe Two sided 55 MX910de MX911de MX911dte 56 MX912de MX912dxe Scanning 57 MX910de 56 MX911de MxX911dte MX912de MX912dxe Copying 53 MX910de 54 MX911de MxX911dte 55 MX911de MX911dte Ready 29 MX910de 31 MX911de MxX911dte MX912de MX912dxe Notices 338 Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE dire
309. se Leave paper in bin 426 xx 428 xx 264 x page jam open doors G H and J and clear jammed paper Leave paper in bin 400 402 255 x page jam press latch at area E to open ADF s top cover 28y xx 269 x page jam press latch to access area G and clear jammed Staples Leave paper in bin 402 93 261 x page jam press latch to access area G Leave paper in bin 40y xx 258 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door C 2yy xx 247 x page jam slide the 3000 sheet tray and open door D 24y xx 251 Cartridge low 88 xy 271 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 271 Cartridge very low 88 xy 271 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 271 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 271 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 271 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 272 Close door x 272 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 272 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 272 359 Defective flash detected 51 272 Disk full 62 273 Disk full scan job canceled 273 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 273 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 273 Empty the hole punch box 273 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 273 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 273 Fax memory full 274 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 274 Fa
310. sed a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters The optional trays come with the following accessories Accessory name Quantity Stabilizing feet 2 Locking clip Metal bracket Additional printer setup Accessory name Quantity Screw 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the printer 3 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material 4 Attach the stabilizing feet to the optional tray Note Make sure the feet click into place 40 Additional printer setup 5 Remove the connector cover from the printer 6 Lift the printer using the handles at the sides A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely 41 Additional printer setup 7 Align the printer with the tray and then lower the printer into place 9 Open Tray 2 and Tray 3 42 Additional printer setup 10 Secure the tray to the printer using the locking clips and the metal bracket Back e Front 11 Reinstall the connector cover 12 Connect the power cord to the printer and electrical outlet 43 Additional printer setup 44 13 Turn on the printer 14 Set the printer software to recognize the optional tray For more informat
311. sher to the left and then remove the jammed paper f SA E3 Notes e Make sure that all paper fragments are removed e f necessary turn spinner wheel G1 downward to feed jammed paper into the finisher bin and then remove the paper Clearing jams 260 3 Slide the finisher back into place 4 Open door C and then remove the jammed paper A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it Notes e Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer e Make sure that all paper fragments are removed e If the 3000 sheet tray is installed then slide the tray to the right to open the door 5 Close door C Clearing jams 261 x page jam press latch to access area G and clear jammed staples Leave paper in bin 402 93 1 Remove all paper from the staple finisher bin a 2 Press the latch on the staple finisher and then slide the finisher to the left 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder Clearing jams 262 4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then remove any loose staples 6 Press the staples against the metal bracket Note If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge then shake the cartridge downward to bring the staples near the metal bracket Clearing jams 263 7 Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clic
312. sible electrical outlet e Make sure that airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard e Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Clean dry and free of dust Away from stray staples and paper clips Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes Learning about the printer e Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations a mer sie 0 05701 a front eens 750in a fietsae 20mm s0in Cs ton atom 05701 Printer configurations Note Make sure to configure the printer on a flat sturdy and stable surface 11 Learning about the printer 12 Basic model ES ADF tray a foen a eomma s Muttburposeteeder 6 Standard zx so0sheorway Configured model CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Learning about the printer 13 Hardware option Alternative hardware option Staple finisher Note This is supported only in select printer models 2 x 500 sheet tray 2500 sheet tray 2500 sheet tra
313. size for HTML documents Notes e 12 pt is the factory default setting e Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale the default font for HTML documents Notes e 100 is the factory default setting e Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Set the page orientation for HTML documents Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 196 Margin Size Set the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes e 19 mm is the factory default setting e Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Note Print is the factory default setting Print Image menu Use Auto Fit Select the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Invert bitonal monochrome images On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scale the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left Best Fit Anchor Center Fit Height Width e When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Notes e Best Fit is the factory default setting Fit Height Fit Width Orientation Set the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Reverse Portrait Rev
314. status of parts and supplies 210 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 239 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 239 cleaning exterior of the printer 205 scanner glass 205 cleaning the charger 206 cleaning the printer 205 cleaning the printhead lens 206 Close door x 272 collate copy options 82 collating copies copying 79 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 272 confidential data information on securing 204 confidential jobs modifying print settings 74 confidential print jobs 73 printing from a Macintosh computer 73 printing from Windows 73 Confidential Print menu 143 Index Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 272 configuration information wireless network 46 Configure MP menu 121 configuring multiple printers 240 configuring e mail settings 84 configuring port settings 49 configuring supply notifications 240 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 104 connecting the printer to an outlet 10 connecting to a wireless network using PIN Personal Identification Number method 48 using Push Button Configuration method 48 using the Embedded Web Server 49 using wireless setup wizard 47 conservation settings brightness adjusting 200 conserving supplies 198 Eco Mode 199 Hibernate mode 199 Sleep Mode 200 conserving supplies 198 contacting customer support 334 content e mail settings 87 content source e mail settings 87 fax options 111
315. stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled 2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage Managing the printer 241 Notification Description Non Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 50 For amore comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings see Erasing non volatile memory on page 203 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory
316. surfaces e Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not e Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities This determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality e When in doubt contact your paper supplier Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following e Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100 post consumer waste content e Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer Paper and specialty media guide 62 e Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray e Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units
317. t Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the photoconductor unit b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 5 a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 6 Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Toner fog or background shading appears on prints a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints Step 2 a Reinstall the photoconductor unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems b Resend the print job Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints 316 Yes No Go to step 5 The problem is solved Go to step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer The problem is solved support Yes No Go to step 2 The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 3 Troubleshooting 317 Action Step 3 Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints Toner rubs
318. t Edge Long Edge Bin Setup menu Use Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Identify the units of measure Notes e Inches is the U S factory default setting e Millimeters is the international factory default setting Set the portrait width Notes e If the width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed e 12 inches is the U S factory default setting You can increase the width in 0 01 inch increments e 305 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the width in 1 mm increments Set the portrait height Notes e If the height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed e 17 inches is the U S factory default setting You can increase the height in 0 01 inch increments e 432 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the height in 1 mm increments Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction Notes e Short Edge is the factory default setting e Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Specify the default bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting x can be any number from 1 to 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name appears only once in the bin list Understanding the printer menus 127 Use Configure Bins Specif
319. t SSID security method preshared key or passphrase network mode and channel 4 Click Submit 5 Turn off the printer and then disconnect the Ethernet cable Then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on 6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network print a network setup page Then in the Network Card x section see if the status is Connected Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP Notes e if the printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes e If the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address then you do not need to make any changes e If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder 2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP open the printer properties 3 Configure the port from the list 4 Update the IP address 5 Apply the changes For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to the list of printers and then select gt IP 2 Type the IP address in the address field Additional printer setup 50 3 Apply the changes Setting up serial printing Windows only After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer Note Serial printing reduces print
320. t all the memory is set to send fax jobs All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Specify whether the printer cancels fax jobs Note Allow is the factory default setting Specify the type of caller ID being used Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Notes e The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask setting e Off is the factory default setting Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 163 Fax Cover Page Configure the fax cover page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default e Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page Notes Never use e Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items Always use Include to Field From Include Message Field Message Include Logo On Include Footer x Footer x Fax Send Settings Resolution Specify quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives better print quality but Standard increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Fine 200 dpi Note Standard is the factory default setting Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Understanding the printer menus 164 Use Ke Original Size Specify the size of the original document Letter Note Mixed
321. t is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu setting applies to all scan functions Text Default Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default Set the quality of a text photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the 5 90 image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image 5 90 Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x FTP bit Depth 1 bit 8 bit 177 Provide a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting e This menu setting applies to all scan functions Specify whether to print the transmission log Note Print log is the factory default setting Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting
322. t that you want to print b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears on the printer display b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 If an error message appears on the printer display then clear the message Note The printer continues to print after clearing the message Do the jobs print Step 4 The problem is solved Go to step 5 a Check if the ports USB serial or Ethernet are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer Note For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 5 The problem is solved Go to step 6 a Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer a Remove and then reinstall the printer software For more support information see Installing the printer on page 45 Note The printer software is available at http support lexmark com b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Troubleshooting Tray linking does not work Notes e The trays can detect paper length 300 e The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size You must set the size from the Pape
323. taller Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine
324. teps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons For more information go to the Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide at http support lexmark com Maintaining the printer 205 Maintaining the printer Warning Potential Damage Failure to maintain optimum printer performance or to replace parts and supplies may cause damage to your printer Cleaning printer parts Cleaning the printer Note You may need to perform this task after every few months Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder 3 Remove any dust lint and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum 4 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water and use it to wipe the outside of the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer 5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job Cleaning the sc
325. ter remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer and then connect the telephone to the port Scenario 3 VoIP telephone service Faxing 97 To connect 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter Note The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port 3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer Tips for this setup To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active plug an analog telephone into the phone port and then listen for a dial tone If you hear a dial tone then the port is active e If you need two phone ports for your devices but do not want to pay additional cost then do not plug the printer into the second phone port You can use a phone splitter Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter Note Make sure you use a phone splitter not a line splitter To make sure that you are using the correct splitter plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone Faxing 98 Scenario 4 Digital telephone s
326. terhead Without an optional finisher One sided printing Note For long edge orientation load letterhead Note For long edge orientation load letterhead facedown with the header on the left side of the facedown with the header on the right side of the feeder feeder Loading paper and specialty media 55 Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher Two sided printing Two sided printing e Load envelopes with the flap side up Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Loading paper and specialty media 56 e Make sure that the paper is below the maximum fill line Overfilling may cause paper jams 5 From the control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the feeder Linking and unlinking trays The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same When a linked tray becomes empty paper feeds from the next linked tray To prevent trays from linking assign a unique custom paper type name Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily
327. the following e Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper and then touch Finished loading paper on the control panel e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the current job Load Multipurpose Feeder with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper e From the control panel touch one of the following Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded To clear the message and continue printing Automatically select paper To use the paper loaded in the tray Reset active bin To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 277 Load Multipurpose Feeder with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper e From the control panel touch one of the following Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded To clear the message and continue printing Automatically select paper To use the paper loaded in the tray Reset active bin To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Load Multipurpose Feeder with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the feeder with the correct size of paper e From the control panel touch one of the fol
328. the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt ZS 3 Touch Copy to and then select the tray that contains the specialty media If you are loading the specialty media into the multipurpose feeder then navigate to Multipurpose Feeder gt Si gt select the size of the specialty media gt ZS gt Transparency or Letterhead 4 Touch Y gt Copy It Creating a copy shortcut Notes e Make sure that Copy Shortcuts is set to Display From the home screen touch gt Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization gt Copy Shortcuts gt Display gt Submit To delete a copy shortcut touch gt Manage Shortcuts gt Copy Shortcuts gt the shortcut to delete gt Delete now Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen touch Copy 2 Adjust the copy settings and then touch Save as Shortcut Note If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created then the settings are not saved 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct and then touch OK If the shortcut name is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information Notes e The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen e You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings Copying 78 Customizing copy s
329. the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Do vertical voids appear on prints Troubleshooting Solving copy problems Copier does not respond Action Check if an error or status message appears on the display Does an error or status message appear Step 2 Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 3 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn it back on Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear Partial document or photo copies Check the placement of the document or photo Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Step 2 Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray From the Paper menu on the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Specify the paper size Depending on your operating system specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do copies print properly 320 Clearthe error or status Go to step 2 message Go to step 3 The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved
330. the tray available in the printer driver USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly Yes No Go to step 2 Check if you have a supported USB or Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed parallel interface card a Install the USB or parallel interface card For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 32 Note A USB or parallel b Printa menu settings page and then check if the USB or parallel interface card from interface card is listed in the Installed Features list another printer Ay not work on this l printer Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection support Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly Paper feed problems Jammed pages are not reprinted Turn on Jam Recovery a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery b From the Jam Recovery menu select On or Auto c Save your changes Do pages reprint after a jam Troubleshooting 293 Paper frequently jams Yes No Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following Make sure paper lies flat in t
331. then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the Message printer back on Is there an error message on the printer display Step 3 Contact customer Tighten the cable Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to SUpport connections make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server secure Partial document or photo scans Action Check the placement of the document or photo Contact customer Load the document or Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner support photo facedown on the glass in the upper left corner scanner glass in the upper left corner Is the document or photo loaded correctly Poor scanned image quality Action Clear the error Go to step 2 Check if an error message appears on the display message Is there an error message on the printer display Step 2 Go to step 3 Increase the scan resolution settings fora higher quality output Check the quality of the original document Is the quality of the original document satisfactory Troubleshooting 330 Action No E Step 3 Go to step 4 See Cleaning the Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean lint free cloth scanner glass on dampened with water page 205 Is the scanner glass clean Step 4 Go to step 5 Place the document or Check t
332. tices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Modular component notice This product may contain the following modular component s Lexmark Regulatory Type Model LEX M01 005 FCC ID IYLLEXM01005 IC 2376A M01005 Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada Under Industry Canada regulations this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum or lesser gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power EIRP is not more than that necessary for successful communication This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standards Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation
333. tory default setting Erase Temporary Data Files menu Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Use Le Wiping Mode Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files Auto Automatic Method Mark all disk space used by a previous print job This method does not permit the file Single pass system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Multiple pass Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting e Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time e Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass method Understanding the printer menus Security Audit Log menu Use Export Log Delete Log Yes No Configure Log Enable Audit Yes No Enable Remote Syslog No Yes Remote Syslog Server 256 character string Remote Syslog Port 1 65535 Remote Syslog Method Normal UDP Stunnel Remote Syslog Facility 0 23 Log full behavior Wrap over oldest entries E mail log then delete all entries 145 Enable an authorized user to export the security log Notes e To export the log from the printer cont
334. u are Goto step 4 Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another scanning application or being used by another user Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user Step 4 Contact customer Select the Append time Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check SUpport stamp or Overwrite box is selected in the destination configuration settings existing file check box in the destination f er configuration settings Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected amp in the destination configuration settings Scanner unit does not close Action Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit a Lift the scanner unit b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open c Lower the scanner unit Did the scanner unit close correctly Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Check if other applications are interfering with the scan Close all applications that are not being used Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Select a lower scan resolution support Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer Troubleshooting 332 The scanner does not respond a Yes Step 1 Go to step 2 Turn on the printer Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Step 2 Go to step 3 Connect the printer Check if the printer
335. u will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the printer display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label at the back of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem Visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com and then select one of the following Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals support documentation drivers and other downloads to help you solve common problems You can send an e mail to the Lexmark team describing your problem A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems install updates or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product Telephone support is also available In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit http support lexmark com Notices 335 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark MX910de MX911dte MX912dxe Machine type
336. ultipurpose feeder may also be linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray Letter Legal 12 x 18 11x17 SRA3 A3 Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus 119 Use Tray x Type Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays Recycled 4 Glossy e f available a user defined name appears instead of Custom Type x Heavy Glossy e Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x MP Feeder Size Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder A4 A5 AG e Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Notes JIS B5 JIS B4 From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for MP Feeder Size to appear as a Menu Letter Legal 12x18 11x17 SRA3 A3 Executive Oficio Mexico Folio The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size The paper size value must be set Statement Universal Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding the printer
337. useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Notes e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting Understanding the printer menus Use Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Paper Saver Border None Solid Staple Job Auto Back Dual Front Off Run Stapler Test Hole Punch 187 Print multiple page images on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The number selected is the number of page images that are printed per side Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Paper Saver Notes e Horizontal is the factory default setting e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Print a border when using Paper Saver Note None is the factory default setting Specify whether printed output is stapled Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a supported stap
338. w Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below Notices 348 Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet gt YMMOPOONETAI MPO2 TIX OYZIOAEIZ ANAITH2EI2 KAI TI AOINE2 2XETIKE2 AIATA El2 TH OAHTIA2 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC EAAnvikhn ME THN NAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO APOION Espanol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esen
339. ways use Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes Fax Job Waiting None Toner Toner and Supplies Rings to Answer 1 25 Auto Answer Yes No Manual Answer Code 0 9 Auto Reduction Paper Source Auto Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Sides Duplex On 167 Specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Note 0 is the factory default setting Enable color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting Allow the printer to receive fax jobs Note On is the factory default setting Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources Note None is the factory default setting Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 3 is the factory default setting Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job Note Yes is the factory default setting Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax Notes e 9 is the factory default setting e This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs Note
340. will not be restored 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message e Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory Insufficient space between paper stacks in Tray 3 Move the paper stacks apart and then touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 276 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper and then touch Finished loading paper on the control panel e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the current job Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper and then touch Finished loading paper on the control panel e Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the print job Load paper source with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper and then touch Finished loading paper on the control panel Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins Cancel the current job Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation Try one or more of
341. x server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 274 Fax Station Name not set up Contact system administrator 274 Fax Station Number not set up Contact system administrator 274 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 274 Insert hole punch box 275 Insert Tray x 275 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 275 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 275 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 275 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 275 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 275 Insufficient space between paper stacks in Tray 3 275 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 276 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 276 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 276 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 276 Index Load Multipurpose Feeder with custom string paper orientation 276 Load Multipurpose Feeder with custom type name paper orientation 277 Load Multipurpose Feeder with paper size paper orientation 277 Load Multipurpose Feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 277 Load staples 277 Load staples G11 G12 278 Memory full 38 278 Memory full cannot print faxes 278 Memory full cannot send faxes 278 Network x software error 54 278 No analog phone line connecte
342. y and then turn it over b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Step 5 Contact customer a Load paper from a fresh package support Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Printer is printing blank pages Action Yes Step 1 Go to step 2 a Check if there is a packing material left on the photoconductor unit 1 Remove the photoconductor unit 2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the photoconductor unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the photoconductor unit b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Step 2 Go to step 3 a Clean the charger and the printhead lens b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages 306 a The problem is solved The problem is solved a The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting 307 Action Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the photoconductor unit and then resend the print job support Is the printer still printing blank pages Printer is printing solid black pages BS Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Reinstall the photoconductor un
343. y 2 x 500 sheet tray Finisher Staple hole punch finisher Booklet finisher When using optional trays 2 3000 sheet tray e The 3000 sheet tray is supported only if another optional tray is installed e The staple finisher is not supported if another finisher is installed Understanding the basic functions of the scanner e Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs e Send a fax using the printer control panel e Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time e Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination e Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF through an FTP Learning about the printer 14 Using the ADF and scanner glass Automatic document feeder ADF Scanner glass e Use the ADF for multiple page or two sided documents e Load an original document faceup e Use the scanner glass for single page documents book pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings e Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow Understanding the printer control panel 15 Understanding the printer control panel Using the control panel Use the To 1 Display e View the printer status and messages Set up and operate the printer 2 Home button Go to the home screen Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode The
344. y also require a longer conditioning period Paper and specialty media guide 61 Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 256 g m 16 68 lb paper grain long paper is recommended Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper witha high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality e Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended printable side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same tray mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead e Use grain long for 60 256 g m 16 68 Ib paper e Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process e Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured
345. y configuration options for bins Mailbox Link Link Optional Type Assignment Overflow Bin Standard Bin Bin x Assign Type Bin Plain Paper Bin Card Stock Bin Transparency Bin Recycled Bin Glossy Bin Heavy Glossy Bin Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Paper Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin Notes Mailbox is the factory default setting This treats each bin as a separate mailbox Link configures all available bins as one large bin Link Optional links together all available bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a bin or linked bin set Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full Notes e This menu appears only when optional bins are installed Standard Bin is the factory default setting Select a bin for each supported paper type For each type select from the following options Disabled Standard Bin Bin x Note Disabled is the factory default setting x can be any number from 1 to 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name appears only once in the bin list Understanding the printer menus 128 Reports menu Reports menu Use Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays install
346. y default setting Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state Notes 20 is the factory default setting Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Allow the printer to print even when the display is off Note Allow printing with display off is the factory default setting Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode Note 3 days is the factory default setting Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active Ethernet connection Note Hibernate is the factory default setting Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning to Ready state Note 30 is the factory default setting Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Timeouts Print Timeout Disabled 1 255 Timeouts Wait Timeout Disabled 15 65535 Timeouts Job Hold Timeout 5 255 Error Recovery Auto Reboot Reboot when idle Reboot always Reboot never Error Recovery Max Auto Reboots 1 20 Print Recovery Auto Continu
347. y terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA 256 382 and AES Galois Counter Mode GCM implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for AES CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm ECDSA implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rig
348. you send 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Faxing 105 Notes e View the IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Inthe Manually Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time Note The use of network time is recommended 4 Click Submit Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Click the Automatically Observe DST check box 4 Inthe Custom Time Zone Setup section set the DST start and end dates 5 Click Submit Sending a fax Sending a fax using the control panel 1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass 2 From the home screen touch Fax and then enter the fax number Notes e You can also enter the recipient using the shortcut numbe
349. zation settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions 12 11 10 Access the Copy menus and make copies Understanding the printer control panel 17 Touch EEEIEI Quickly find and print frequently used online forms Menu icon Access the printer menus Note The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links Note The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function and not from any other application 10 USB Drive View select print scan or e mail photos and documents from a flash drive Note This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer Ey Held Jobs Display all current held jobs Status Supplies e Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing e Access the messages screen for more information on the message and how to clear it oa Open a context sensitive Help dialog Search Held Jobs Search for one or more of the following items e User name for held or confidential print jobs e Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs e Profile names Bookmark container or print job names USB container or print job names for supported file types Features Description Menu trail line A menu trail line is located at the top of each
350. ze range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Note Auto is the factory default setting Show and set the printer network settings Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Reports e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Reports Understanding the printer menus 131 Use To Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Network Card e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Network Card View Card Status View the connection status of the wireless network adapter Connected Disco

User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents